diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-22 19:15:20 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-22 19:15:20 -0800 |
| commit | e598ae0edebf6ed8af9e8b6aa1b9cab8f1403887 (patch) | |
| tree | 9289c399375894415e1f0e3e5922e3514c9ea903 /old/66030-0.txt | |
| parent | 22271b9243831438ffc79acc13aafea77fea9861 (diff) | |
Diffstat (limited to 'old/66030-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66030-0.txt | 8769 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8769 deletions
diff --git a/old/66030-0.txt b/old/66030-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index d26a98f..0000000 --- a/old/66030-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8769 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook, A Lad of Mettle, by Nat Gould - - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - - - - -Title: A Lad of Mettle - - -Author: Nat Gould - - - -Release Date: August 10, 2021 [eBook #66030] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - - -***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A LAD OF METTLE*** - - -E-text prepared by Demian Katz, Craig Kirkwood, and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net) from page images generously made -available by Villanova University Digital Library -(https://digital.library.villanova.edu/) - - - -Note: Images of the original pages are available through - Villanova University Digital Library. See - https://digital.library.villanova.edu/Item/vudl:279070 - - -Transcriber’s note: - - Text enclosed by underscores is in italics (_italics_). - - A detailed transcriber’s note is at the end of the book. - - - - - -A LAD OF METTLE - - - * * * * * - -NAT GOULD’S SPORTING NOVELS - -_Crown 8vo., Picture Boards._ - - THE DOUBLE EVENT - RUNNING IT OFF - JOCKEY JACK - HARRY DALE’S JOCKEY - BANKER AND BROKER - THROWN AWAY - STUCK UP - ONLY A COMMONER - THE MINERS’ CUP - THE MAGPIE JACKET - WHO DID IT? - HORSE OR BLACKSMITH? - NOT SO BAD AFTER ALL - SEEING HIM THROUGH - -_Also, uniform with the above_, - - ON AND OFF THE TURF IN AUSTRALIA - TOWN AND BUSH - THE DOCTOR’S DOUBLE - A LAD OF METTLE - - * * * * * - - -A LAD OF METTLE - -by - -NAT GOULD - -Author of ‘The Double Event,’ etc. - - - - - - -London -George Routledge and Sons, Limited -Broadway, Ludgate Hill - - - -To MY SONS. - - - - -CONTENTS - - - CHAPTER PAGE - - I. BULLY RAKES TAKEN DOWN 9 - - II. IN THE CRICKET-FIELD 19 - - III. A CRITICAL MOMENT 28 - - IV. LEAVING SCHOOL 38 - - V. A FURIOUS STORM 46 - - VI. THE ‘DISTANT SHORE’ 55 - - VII. WHAT THE MORNING BROUGHT FORTH 64 - - VIII. IN WAL JESSOP’S COTTAGE 74 - - IX. UP COUNTRY 83 - - X. A WILD SCENE 92 - - XI. YACKA THE BLACK 101 - - XII. IN SEARCH OF ADVENTURES 110 - - XIII. BY THE LAGOON 119 - - XIV. ON THE OVERLAND LINE 129 - - XV. THROUGH THE RANGES 139 - - XVI. AFTER THE FIGHT 148 - - XVII. WONDROUS CAVERNS 158 - - XVIII. THE WHITE SPIRIT 167 - - XIX. THE FORCES OF NATURE 176 - - XX. THE RETURN TO YANDA 186 - - XXI. AN EXCITING CHASE 195 - - XXII. TIME FLIES 204 - - XXIII. AN EVENTFUL NIGHT 214 - - XXIV. HOME AGAIN 223 - - XXV. THE SCENE AT LORD’S 232 - - XXVI. AN UPHILL GAME 241 - - XXVII. THE CAPTAIN OR HIS GHOST 250 - - XXVIII. A STRANGE STORY 259 - - XXIX. WARLIKE SPORTS 269 - - XXX. GOOD-BYE TO AUSTRALIA 278 - - * * * * * - -A LAD OF METTLE - - - - -CHAPTER I. BULLY RAKES TAKEN DOWN. - - -Lessons were over for the day, and the boys at Redbank School came -running with shouts and whoops of joy into the playing-fields. They -were like young colts freed from restraint for a few hours, and eager -to make the most of their liberty. - -Redbank was the home of brilliant cricketers and all-round athletes. -Many a noted cricketer had received his first lessons in the great game -on Redbank cricket ground. The lads were proud of the men who played in -the All England eleven, and who were never slow to acknowledge that to -Redbank they owed what prowess they possessed. - -The Redbank lads were born runners, so many an old hand training them -for races vowed. Something in the atmosphere of Redbank seemed to make -the lads athletic. Perhaps the traditions attached to the school had -much to do with this, for lads are very proud, and justly so, of the -feats of scholars who have preceded them. - -But Redbank was not merely a training ground for famous athletes. -Redbank scholars had taken high honours at the Universities, and -afterwards distinguished themselves in various walks of life. The -Bishop of Flaxham was proud of the fact that he was ‘grounded’ at -Redbank. He was an eloquent and distinguished man, an ornament to the -Church, and a brilliant writer of readable books. - -When the Bishop of Flaxham came to Redbank, and preached in the chapel, -the lads with difficulty restrained themselves from giving him a hearty -cheer at the end of his address. The Bishop knew how to talk to boys, -and never forgot that at one period of his life he had been bored with -wearisome sermons about the world, the flesh, and the devil, which -he did not in the least understand. So he took warning, and told the -lads to run the race set before them much in the same manner as they -would a hundred yards sprint, each striving to win the prize and do the -distance in even time. The Bishop believed that well-trained muscles -and a healthy body were conducive to an active and moral state of mind. -The Redbank lads gloried in the fact that the Bishop of Flaxham had -been one of themselves. - -Field-Marshal Lord Kingcraft was a Redbank boy, and his warlike deeds -and bravery were celebrated in song on the fly-leaves of school-books, -and occasionally on the panels of doors and the insides of desks. - - ‘Lord Kingcraft’s won the great V.C., - May Redbank do the same for me.’ - -was discovered carved, evidently with much labour and pains, on the lid -of a desk at which the celebrated Field-Marshal formerly worried his -brains over Euclid and algebra. - -This inscription was pointed out to the brave leader of men when he -visited his old school, and he never forgot it. He hoped, from the -bottom of his heart, the lad who carved it would one day win his V.C. - -Redbank was represented in the navy and in the diplomatic world, and -one day it was hoped a Redbank lad would become Prime Minister. - -So, with all these successful public men constantly before them as an -example, the lads of Redbank felt bound to endeavour to do great deeds, -and win renown for themselves and their school. - -The head-master of Redbank was the Rev. Henry Hook, and it was -universally acknowledged that no more suitable man could have been -selected. He ruled his lads with a firm hand, but he was no tyrant or -hard task-master. The boys knew he meant what he said, and that his -word to them could be implicitly relied upon. He had confidence in his -boys, and they returned it. - -When Edgar Foster came to Redbank School he was sixteen, small for his -age, but muscular and active. At this time there were between two and -three hundred scholars at Redbank, and naturally out of such a number -there were several lads whose absence would not have been regretted. - -Young Edgar Foster soon became popular. For one thing, his father was -a well-known man, who had worthily upheld the honour of Redbank in the -cricket field, and had captained the All England eleven. This was quite -sufficient to give Edgar a standing in the school. - -Bullies exist in almost every walk of life, and a few of this -undesirable species were to be found at Redbank. The leader of these -bullies was a lad named Raymond Rakes--‘Bully Rakes’ as he was -generally called. He was a big, hulking fellow, powerful and strong, -but deficient in courage, as bullies generally are. - -There was nothing manly about Bully Rakes, and the boys knew it. So -far he had held his own, for he was the biggest boy in the school. Any -new scholar he at once endeavoured to inspire with awe, and generally -succeeded. - -Our story commences about a week after Edgar Foster’s arrival at -Redbank. The boys were bounding out of school and soon spread over -the fields in groups; the bulk of them, however, went towards the -cricketing nets. - -Edgar Foster had not had any opportunity of showing what he could -do with the bat. He was a lad who did not push himself forward, but -quietly bided his time, knowing full well that when that time came he -would not be found wanting. The boy is father to the man, and it will -be gathered from this story of a lad of mettle that Edgar Foster acted -in this wise during many trying periods of his after-life. - -Edgar watched the practice with keen and critical eyes. His father had -taught him how to handle a bat as only a skilful player can. - -‘Here, Foster, take a turn,’ said the lad who had just finished -batting. ‘We’ve not had the chance of seeing how you shape yet.’ - -‘I’m ready,’ said Edgar, pulling off his coat and eagerly holding out a -hand for the bat. - -‘It’s my turn,’ said Bully Rakes. ‘Just you drop that bat, or I’ll make -you.’ - -Edgar Foster looked up at the big fellow standing before him, but he -did not flinch, nor did he drop the bat. - -The boys crowded round, anticipating a row, and anxious to see how the -new-comer would shape with Rakes. - -‘If it is your turn,’ said Edgar quietly, ‘I will give you the bat. If -it is not your turn, under no circumstances will I drop the bat.’ - -The tones were firm, there was no flinching, and the lad looked -determined. - -Bully Rakes was not accustomed to be addressed in this manner. He eyed -Edgar scornfully, and said: - -‘I shall have to teach you manners. I am the best judge of whose turn -it is. Will you drop that bat?’ - -Edgar turned to the lad who had handed him the bat, and said: - -‘Do you bat in turns? Has Rakes any right to bat before me?’ - -Courage is infectious. Will Brown had never defied Rakes before, but he -felt he must back up his plucky schoolmate. - -‘Rakes has no right to bat here at all,’ he replied. ‘He’s been batting -at the other net, and has just finished his turn.’ - -Edgar Foster made no further remark, but walked coolly to the wicket. - -This defiance of his demands gave Bully Rakes a shock. He knew if he -allowed Foster to bat his hold over the boys would be gone. He strode -up to Edgar and said savagely: - -‘Give me the bat, or I’ll thrash you!’ - -‘Had you asked me politely at first, I should probably have handed -you the bat,’ said Edgar. ‘I shall not do so now. As for thrashing -me--well, that has to be decided.’ - -‘Bravo, Foster!’ shouted several lads. - -‘Punch his head, Rakes,’ said one of the bully’s toadies. - -‘Give me that bat, or fight me!’ shouted Rakes in a passion. - -‘Shame!’ shouted the lads. - -Rakes was much taller and more powerfully built than Edgar. - -Edgar Foster handed the bat to Will Brown, and said: - -‘Come on, I’m ready.’ - -Bully Rakes had his coat off, and the boys, seeing a fight about to -take place, formed a ring. They would have given much to see Bully -Rakes get a severe thrashing. - -Now they were in a fighting attitude the disparity between the lads was -more apparent. Edgar was lightly built, but active, and evidently in -good condition. Bully Rakes was massive, heavy, and ponderous in his -movements. The boys were determined to see fair play, and gave Edgar -every encouragement. As usual, when he had to fight, Bully Rakes rushed -in at close quarters, and tried to overwhelm his smaller opponent by -the force of his onslaught. - -Edgar, however, was ready for him. He knew how to box better than most -lads of his age. His father had taught him, impressing upon him that -because he knew how to use his fists he ought not to pick quarrels. - -Seeing Bully Rakes rush at him, Edgar sprang nimbly to one side. The -bigger lad stumbled forward and almost fell. Thus foiled at the first -attempt, Rakes lost his temper. He heard the lads jeering at him, and -he determined he would make Edgar suffer for the humiliation. - -Recovering himself, Rakes glared at Edgar and then aimed a terrific -blow at his ribs. Quick as lightning shot out Edgar’s left and caught -Rakes on the ear. It was a stinging blow, and the bully did not take -punishment well. Rakes again rushed at Edgar, and, closing with him, -kicked him severely on the shin. It was a despicable act, and several -lads pulled Rakes back, others shouting ‘Coward!’ and ‘Foul play!’ - -‘Hands off!’ shouted Rakes. ‘You’d better not interfere with me.’ - -‘Leave him to Foster,’ said Will Brown; ‘he’ll settle him.’ - -A roar of laughter followed this remark, and made Bully Rakes furious. - -‘Stand up and fight fair,’ said Edgar. ‘Who taught you to kick? We’re -not playing football.’ - -The boys were delighted. Here was young Foster taking it out of Bully -Rakes, and chaffing him unmercifully. - -Rakes again commenced the attack, but with more caution. He was not a -match for his young opponent when it came to science. He managed to -land a blow on Edgar’s right eye, but the return he received fairly -between his own eyes staggered him. Edgar followed up his advantage and -soon had the satisfaction of seeing Bully Rakes measure his length on -the grass. - -The younger boys danced with delight as the defeat of their enemy -looked assured. - -Rakes, however, was not yet beaten. He staggered to his feet and -fought again with some determination. Feeling he had met his match, his -courage, what little he possessed, gave way, and Edgar soon had the -bully at his mercy. Edgar was not disposed to let him off lightly, and -he knocked Rakes about in a manner that both astonished and alarmed him. - -‘Have you had enough?’ said Edgar, standing over him after another -knock-down blow. ‘If not, get up, and I’ll repeat the dose.’ - -‘I’ve done for to-day,’ growled Rakes; ‘but I’ll be even with you for -this, see if I don’t.’ - -‘Take your defeat like a man,’ said Edgar, ‘and drop bullying in the -future. Where’s the bat?’ he added, turning to Will Brown. - -But the boys would not let him bat. They cheered him and shook hands -with him, and Edgar felt he had quickly made a position for himself in -the school. - -Bully Rakes slunk away with one or two companions, who had been tempted -by his example to bully on a smaller scale, and were downcast at his -defeat. - -‘You’ll get into a row,’ said Will Brown to Edgar. ‘The chief can’t -bear fighting, but when he hears the truth, I fancy he’ll side with -you.’ - -‘He’ll hear the truth then,’ said Edgar. ‘I shall ask to see him when -we reach school.’ - -‘I shouldn’t,’ said Will Brown. ‘None of the masters may have noticed -it.’ - -‘It makes no difference to me whether they have noticed it or -otherwise,’ said Edgar; ‘I shall tell the doctor all about it, if he -will see me. It is the most straightforward way, as I have only been -about a week in the school.’ - -‘Perhaps you’re right,’ said Will Brown. - -‘Sure of it,’ said Edgar. - -That evening Dr. Hook received a polite note from Edgar Foster, in -which he asked for an interview. Dr. Hook knew Edgar’s father, and -admired him for his many manly qualities. - -‘You wanted to see me, Foster,’ said Dr. Hook, when the lad came into -his study. - -Then, catching sight of Edgar’s discoloured eye, he frowned. - -Edgar explained what had occurred in the cricket-field. Dr. Hook -listened attentively, noting the boy’s face all the time. His scrutiny -was evidently favourable. - -‘I am glad you came to me,’ said the head-master; ‘I strongly object to -fighting, but in this instance I think it may be overlooked. Send Rakes -to me when you go out.’ - -‘Please, sir,’ said Edgar, and hesitated. ‘I hope you will not punish -Rakes; I gave it him severely this afternoon.’ - -Dr. Hook smiled as he said: - -‘No, I will not punish Rakes; I merely wish to speak to him about his -conduct. You may go.’ - -‘That lad will get on in the world,’ thought Dr. Hook, when the door -closed behind Edgar. ‘I’m glad he thrashed Rakes; it will do him good.’ - -Bully Rakes got a very different reception to Edgar Foster, and as -he left the room he vowed he would have his revenge upon Edgar for -‘sneaking’ to the head-master. - - - - -CHAPTER II. IN THE CRICKET-FIELD. - - -The thrashing of Bully Rakes gave Edgar Foster a hold over the -affections of his schoolfellows, and he never lost it. In twelve months -he became captain of the eleven, and led them to victory on many -occasions. Edgar worked hard, both at lessons and play. He found it -much easier to study when his body was in good order, and his athletic -exercises helped to make his school tasks the easier. He could not be -called a brilliant scholar by any means, but he was endowed with an -amount of perseverance that generally pulled him through. - -‘It’s got to be done, and I’ll do it,’ Edgar thought to himself when -pondering over a difficult task, and he generally succeeded. - -The Redbank lads took a defeat from their great opponents, the eleven -of Fairfield College, with a very bad grace. Not that they allowed -their successful opponents to see their chagrin, they were too manly -for that, but they felt the defeat keenly. - -Edgar Foster determined to win the return match if possible. He had -taken great care to select his eleven, and felt confident of success. -He was the more eager to win because his father was coming to Redbank -to watch the game. Dr. Hook too was anxious his boys should regain -their lost laurels, and he encouraged Edgar by his kindly advice. - -It so happened that Raymond Rakes, despite his many bad qualities, was -a very fair cricketer. He had not been chosen to play in the first -match against Fairfield, and he put his being left out of the team down -to Edgar’s animosity. - -Edgar Foster, however, was not actuated by any such motive. He thought -Rakes hardly good enough, and therefore did not select him. Since this -match Rakes had shown such good form that Edgar decided to include him -in the eleven for the return match. - -Bully Rakes was much surprised when Edgar asked him to play. He said he -would think over the matter, and complained about not being chosen in -the first match. - -‘You had not shown good enough form then,’ said Edgar; ‘you have come -on wonderfully since, and therefore I ask you to play. It is for the -honour of the school we are playing this time, so you ought to have no -hesitation.’ - -‘Then I’ll play,’ said Rakes, in his usual surly manner. - -‘And I hope you will make a good score,’ said Edgar. - -As the captain of the Redbank eleven walked away, Rakes looked after -him with no friendly eyes. He had never forgotten the humiliating -defeat he sustained when Edgar first came to the school. No opportunity -had yet occurred of paying off the grudge he owed Edgar on that account. - -‘He’s set his heart on winning this match,’ muttered Rakes to himself; -‘he’d have left me out again if he could. I’ve a good mind to spoil his -plans. What does it matter whether we win or lose the match? I don’t -care much which way it goes, and I’d like to see Foster taken down a -peg or two. I’ll wait and see how our side shapes. I may be able to -carry out a plan of my own.’ - -Had Edgar Foster doubted Rakes, he would not have asked him to play; -but he could not understand any lad throwing away a chance of victory -merely to spite the captain of the team. Such conduct Edgar would not -have suspected even in Raymond Rakes. - -‘So you’ve asked Rakes to play?’ said Will Brown, who had become a -stanch friend of Edgar’s ever since the fight with Bully Rakes. - -‘Yes,’ said Edgar. ‘He’s not a bad bat at all; he’s a fair field, and -will do to put on for a change bowler. We must win the match. I’m -awfully anxious about it. My father will be here, and there’s sure -to be a big crowd of people. We have a good team, and I’m pretty -confident this time.’ - -‘All the same, I should not have played Rakes,’ said Will Brown. - -‘Why?’ asked Edgar. - -‘Because I don’t trust him. He’s never forgiven you for licking him, -and if he gets half a chance he’ll throw us over in the match, just to -spite you,’ said Will. - -Edgar looked at his schoolmate in surprise. He could not believe in any -lad doing such a thing. - -‘He’ll never do that,’ said Edgar. ‘Even if it is as you say, and he -still bears me a grudge, he would never be such a cad as to throw the -school over in order to annoy me.’ - -‘I hope he won’t, for your sake,’ said Will; ‘but all the same, I have -my doubts.’ - -Will Brown’s words made Edgar feel uneasy for a time, but he soon -forgot them. It was universally agreed that a better eleven could not -have been chosen to meet Fairfield College. Masters were not to play; -it was to be purely a boys’ match. - -Early and late Edgar was at the cricket nets watching the practice -and debating how he should send his team in to bat. For such a young -lad, he had keen powers of observation, and he made a pretty accurate -calculation as to the pluck and nerve of each boy. Edgar’s father -arrived the day before the match, and saw the final practice. - -‘You have a real good team,’ he said to his son, ‘and ought to win. -Remember, a good deal depends upon the captain.’ - -‘I’m not likely to forget that,’ said Edgar. ‘You have often told me a -good captain wins many a game at cricket.’ - -Robert Foster was proud of his son, and naturally felt anxious to see -him successful. - -‘How’s my lad doing?’ he had said to the head-master. - -‘Well--very well,’ said Dr. Hook. ‘He is not a brilliant scholar, but -he will get on in the world. He is like his father in one respect. -He is about the best cricketer and all-round athlete we have in the -school.’ - -Robert Foster’s eyes brightened, and he said: - -‘I’m glad of that. I’m not a rich man, and my lad will have to fight -his own battles. He has a great inclination to go abroad, and I don’t -know that it will not be a good thing for him. His sister will be able -to keep me from feeling lonely.’ - -Dr. Hook looked at Robert Foster with his kindly eyes, and replied: - -‘Travel expands the mind. If a lad has plenty of ballast, he will take -no harm in any part of the world. Your son is a lad of mettle, and you -need have no fear about his future. If I am a judge of character, I -should say Edgar Foster is a lad who will surmount difficulties and -dangers, and he is bound to be a leader of men.’ - -Robert Foster was proud of the way in which the head-master spoke -of his son. How little do thoughtless schoolboys know the pleasure -a father feels in hearing praise bestowed upon his child, or of the -pang he feels when the son he loves strays from the right path. -Robert Foster loved his son devotedly, although he made very little -demonstration of his affection, and Edgar thoroughly understood and -appreciated the manly qualities of his father. - -The eventful day arrived, and a glorious day it was. The sun shone -brightly, and there was a slight cool breeze. Redbank cricket ground -was charmingly situated. The pavilion was small, but there were several -large trees growing at the back which afforded ample shade. The ground -was level and well-kept, and the pitch had much care bestowed upon it. -It was a great day at Redbank when this return match with Fairfield -College was to be played. Flushed with the triumph of their previous -victory, the Fairfield lads were eager for the fray, and had invited -many friends to come and witness their further triumph. The captain -of the Fairfield eleven, Harold Simpson, was almost as popular at -Fairfield as Edgar Foster was at Redbank. The two captains had a mutual -liking for each other, although each one was determined to beat the -other in the great game they were about to play. - -Edgar Foster lost the toss, and, as the ground was in such good order, -Harold Simpson elected to send his men in first. - -‘They are a strong batting team,’ said Edgar to his father. ‘It will -take us some time to get rid of them.’ - -‘It is a one-day match, so you must do your level best to get them out -quickly,’ said his father. - -As the boys filed on to the field they were cheered by their comrades -and the Redbank supporters, who had mustered in strong force. - -Edgar Foster came in for a special share of applause, and he felt his -pulses tingle and his heart beat high with hope as he bounded over the -springy turf towards the wickets. - -The two Fairfield batsmen were wildly cheered by their mates, and -Harold Simpson decided on this occasion to go in first. - -Will Brown and Sayers junior were put on to bowl. - -An anxious moment is that during which the first ball in a match is -delivered. The bowler goes back from the wicket, measuring his men; for -a second or two he hesitates and looks round, then he glances at the -batsman, sees all is ready, and prepares for the delivery. As he takes -his run to the wicket the spectators hold their breath. Will this first -ball be fatal? A sigh of relief goes round as the batsman plays it well -forward. - -Harold Simpson failed to score in Brown’s first over. Sayers junior -then took the ball, and his first delivery made the bails fly, much to -the delight of the Redbank boys, who shouted and cheered vociferously. - -Edgar Foster felt they had commenced well, and was anxious for the -good-fortune to continue. The Fairfield boys were determined bats, and -a long stand took place before the second batsman was got rid of. - -Harold Simpson still kept his wicket up, and runs came freely. At the -fall of the fifth wicket Fairfield had put a hundred runs on, of which -the captain had made forty. - -Edgar Foster went on to bowl. He was not such a good bowler as Rakes, -who thought he ought to have been tried before, and looked sullen. - -In his first over Harold Simpson skied a ball to Raymond Rakes. It -was an easy catch, but Rakes missed it, and so clumsily that the boys -jeered at him. - -Will Brown, who had been watching him, thought: - -‘He dropped that on purpose, because Edgar bowled it.’ - -Nothing daunted at this stroke of bad luck, Edgar sent another similar -ball down. Harold Simpson hesitated for a moment as to what he should -do with it; then he struck out, and, strange to say, the ball went to -Rakes again. - -It was not such an easy catch as the former one, but, still, there -ought to have been very little difficulty in a good fielder securing -it. Rakes fumbled it badly, and again missed the catch. - -Edgar Foster could not help thinking of what Will Brown had said to -him. He was very much annoyed, and at the conclusion of his over said -to Rakes: - -‘Those were two easy catches to miss; they may cost us the match.’ - -‘They were not as easy as they looked,’ said Rakes. ‘You don’t suppose -I dropped them on purpose, do you?’ - -‘I should be very sorry to think that,’ said Edgar; ‘but be more -careful next time.’ - -At last Will Brown secured Harold Simpson’s wicket, and the others -followed rapidly, the innings closing for a hundred and thirty-four, a -good score in a one-day school match. - -‘What do you think of it, Edgar?’ asked his father. ‘Shall you be able -to wipe that off?’ - -‘I think so,’ replied Edgar. ‘We should have had a much easier task had -Rakes held those two catches off my bowling.’ - -‘He made an awful mess of them,’ said Robert Foster. ‘How he dropped -the first puzzles me; he had it fairly in his hands.’ - -‘Look here, Edgar!’ said Will Brown. ‘It’s no use mincing matters. I’m -sure Rakes missed those catches purposely. When are you going to send -him in?’ - -‘About seventh,’ said Edgar. - -‘Put him in last,’ said Will. - -‘That would only make matters worse,’ said Edgar; ‘he would know I -doubted him, and act accordingly. He shall go in sixth wicket down. It -will give him a chance of making up for missing those catches.’ - -‘As you wish,’ said Will. ‘Mind, if you are in with him, he does not -run you out.’ - -‘No fear of that,’ said Edgar, laughing. - -And he crossed over to speak to Raymond Rakes. - -‘You go in sixth wicket down,’ he said. - -‘All right,’ replied Rakes, ‘that will suit me.’ - -‘We’ve not been very good friends,’ said Edgar, ‘but you know it is not -my fault. We want to win this match, and it may be that your batting -will turn the scale in our favour at a critical point of the game. I -shall rely upon you to do your best for the honour of the school. You -missed two very easy catches; try and make up for it by playing your -best when you go in to bat.’ - -‘I always do,’ said Rakes sulkily, and walked away. - -Edgar Foster felt rather sorry he had included Raymond Rakes in the -Redbank eleven. - - - - -CHAPTER III. A CRITICAL MOMENT. - - -As Edgar Foster walked to the wickets he felt much depended upon him. -He was going in first, taking first over, and if he failed to play with -confidence it would set a bad example to the remainder of the team. It -was, however, at such moments as these that Edgar Foster’s courage and -spirit did not fail him. - -As he took his position at the wicket he looked round him with a -confident air to see how the field was placed. He saw Harold Simpson -had so placed his men that not a chance would be thrown away, provided -the bowlers were in good form. After a few moments’ delay Edgar handled -his bat confidently, and prepared to receive the first ball of the over. - -A lad named Winter was bowling, and Edgar knew he was a promising -youngster. The first ball pitched short and then shot forward at a -tremendous pace. It was a ball that might have deceived any batsman, -and Edgar had only just time to change his mind and block it. The -escape was narrow, and the boys saw it, but they knew the ball was well -played, and cheered. - -‘Thought it had him,’ said Robert Foster to one of the Redbank masters. - -‘It would have been a stroke of bad luck for us if he had gone out,’ -was the reply. - -Off the next ball Edgar scored a couple, and the fourth ball of the -over he skied on to the pavilion. - -‘That first ball put him on his mettle,’ thought his father. - -Strange to say, in the next over Edgar’s partner was dismissed first -ball in a similar manner to that in which the Fairfield batsman was out. - -Will Brown was next in, and he and Edgar made things lively. They -fairly collared the bowling, and gave the Fairfield team plenty of -leather-hunting. Fours came freely, and Harold Simpson began to look -rather downcast. However, when Will Brown was bowled with the score at -eighty, the Fairfield captain brightened up again. He knew how often a -collapse followed a long stand, and how ‘glorious’ was the uncertainty -of cricket. - -Will Brown’s partnership with Edgar had put the Redbank boys into an -excellent humour, and they were prepared to cheer every hit. What they -were not prepared for happened. This was the collapse of the next four -batsmen. Three of them were bowled in one over, and the fourth had his -bails sent flying when he had scored two. Eighty for two wickets, and -eighty-two for six wickets altered the game completely. - -It was now the turn of the Fairfield boys to give vent to their -delight. The prospect of defeat had not been pleasant, but this -sudden change mended the fortunes of their side, and they were wild -with the sudden revulsion of feeling. They chaffed the Redbank lads -unmercifully, until at one time there was danger of a fistic war. - -This was, however, happily averted by the appearance of Raymond -Rakes, who was cheered as he went to the wickets. Although Rakes -was unpopular, the boys knew he was a fair bat, and they wished to -encourage him to make a stand with Edgar Foster. - -As Rakes came to the wickets Edgar went forward to meet him. - -‘Play steady,’ said Edgar; ‘I feel I am well set. If you play carefully -for a few overs you will soon master the bowling. Remember how much -depends upon you. We shall have to win the match between us.’ - -‘I’ll see what I can do,’ said Rakes. ‘It’s precious bad luck four of -our best bats going out like this.’ - -‘Don’t think of that,’ said Edgar. ‘Try and make up for it by piling up -a good score.’ - -Raymond Rakes followed Edgar’s advice, and soon found he had very -little difficulty in playing the bowling. He knew how anxious Edgar -was, not only to win the match, but to make fifty because his father -was present. - -‘I’m well set,’ thought Rakes. ‘I’d like to get him out. It would cut -him up terribly to be run out. Even if he got out we have a chance. I -can make a fair score, and our tail-end is not a bad one.’ - -Still harbouring such thoughts as these Raymond Rakes batted steadily, -and Edgar was immensely pleased to see him scoring freely, and the -Redbank boys were cheering every stroke. They watched the scoring-board -intently, and grew more and more excited with every run. Suddenly there -was a loud cry of dismay from the boys. Some shouted ‘Run, Rakes!’ -others ‘Go back, Foster!’ - -Edgar Foster hit a ball forward, and called to Rakes to run. Had Rakes -come at once it would have been an easy but smart run. Rakes started -late, and then when Edgar Foster was three parts of the way down the -pitch shouted to him to go back, and ran back himself. This left Edgar -in a most unenviable position. The ball was smartly fielded, and as -Edgar ran back he saw it flash past him straight for the wicket-keeper. - -‘I’m done,’ thought Edgar, but he ran on as fast as possible. - -It was a critical moment. The wicket-keeper in some unaccountable way -fumbled the ball, and only knocked the bails off as Edgar reached the -crease. - -‘How’s that?’ came from wicket-keeper, bowler, and fielders in a -general chorus. - -They were anxious to see Edgar out, for he had given them a lot of -trouble, and seemed likely to give more. - -‘Not out!’ promptly came the decision of the umpire, and a roar -of applause echoed over the field as the Redbank lads danced with -delight, and flung their caps high into the air because their captain -had another chance given him. Edgar knew the decision of the umpire -was correct, and he thanked his lucky star that the wicket-keeper had -fumbled the ball. When he thought of Raymond Rakes he felt inclined to -give him a bit of his mind, but he determined to treat the matter as a -pure accident until the close of the game. As for Raymond Rakes he was -savage at the non-success of his plan. He had deliberately tried to run -Edgar out. It was a dirty trick, and he knew it, but he was bitterly -disappointed that it had not been successful. - -‘Hang the fellow! he seems to have all the luck,’ thought Raymond. ‘I -wonder if he suspects anything?’ - -The idea of Edgar Foster suspecting he had acted in such a manner -made Rakes feel uneasy, for he had not forgotten the punishment Edgar -gave him when he first came to the school. He did not bat with such -confidence, and Edgar put this down to its proper cause. Runs came -freely again, for Edgar felt the result of the match depended almost -entirely upon himself. When his score reached fifty the cheering broke -out again, and made Rakes turn green with envy. - -‘He shall have a new bat for that,’ said Robert Foster. ‘By Jove! he -deserves it. He’s batting splendidly. I’m glad that big hulking fellow -did not run him out.’ - -Before the score reached a hundred Rakes was caught. He was not very -warmly greeted as he returned to the pavilion. The boys knew how -matters stood between him and Edgar, and they had a shrewd suspicion -Bully Rakes had tried to get Edgar run out. - -Rakes flung his bat down in a corner of the dressing-room and took off -his pads. - -‘You didn’t manage to run him out,’ said Will Brown. - -‘Who wanted to run him out?’ said Rakes angrily; ‘I didn’t. It was his -own fault. There was no run, and I didn’t want to get out through his -foolishness.’ - -‘You’d better tell him that when the match is over,’ said Will Brown. -‘He’ll probably want an explanation. If he believes you, well and -good; if not--oh my, won’t you just catch it!’ - -Bully Rakes took up a pad and hurled it at his tormentor. - -‘Get out of this, you little beast!’ he said. ‘You know I can’t touch -you here, or you’d not be so cheeky.’ - -‘Mind and keep clear of Edgar’s left if it comes to war,’ said Will -Brown. ‘I fancy you know he’s a good fist at the end of his left arm.’ - -Bully Rakes jumped to his feet and made towards the speaker; but Will -Brown was too quick for him, and shot out at the side door. - -Meanwhile the game was at a critical stage. Edgar Foster was playing -at his best. He did not give a chance, nor did he throw away an -opportunity of stealing a run. He knew that every run was of vast -importance. A run lost might mean the match lost. Sayers junior was in -with him, and blocked steadily while his captain made the runs. The -fielders were on the alert, and were smart and active, and many a run -was saved. Harold Simpson was a good general, and handled his men well. - -‘It does one good to watch a game like this,’ said Robert Foster to -Dr. Hook. ‘I have seldom seen lads field better, and Edgar is batting -really well. Who is the little chap keeping his end up so well?’ - -‘Sayers junior,’ said Dr. Hook. ‘He’s helping your son famously.’ - -‘Playing a most unselfish game,’ said Robert Foster. ‘That is how -matches are won. A selfish player at any game is a big handicap on his -side.’ - -A burst of cheering from lusty throats stopped the conversation. It -was caused by Edgar Foster hitting a ball over the pavilion--a mighty -stroke for a lad. - -‘Well hit!’ ‘Bravo, Foster!’ ‘Three cheers for our skipper!’ And the -Redbank lads shouted until they were hoarse. - -The match was, however, not yet won. Sayers junior played a ball on to -his wicket when ten runs remained to be got to tie and eleven to win. - -‘I am afraid we shall lose,’ said Dr. Hook, as the ninth man was clean -bowled and the last of the team went in. - -‘Can he bat at all?’ asked Robert Foster anxiously. - -‘He is uncertain, but at times he shapes well,’ said one of the masters. - -‘Then I hope it is his day for shaping well,’ said Edgar’s father. - -‘Block them, Bull,’ said Edgar, as the lad came to the wicket. - -‘I’ll do my level best,’ said Bull, ‘and I don’t feel a bit nervous.’ - -‘That’s right,’ said Edgar. ‘Then, between us we must win the match.’ - -Fortunately Edgar was batting, and he hit the first ball sent him after -Bull came in for a single. It was fielded smartly, thrown in swiftly, -the wicket-keeper could not quite reach it, and there was another run -for an overthrow. This gave Edgar another chance before the over was -finished, and he promptly took advantage of it, hitting the next ball -round to leg for three. The excitement was intense. Would Bull be -able to keep his wicket up during this over? The Redbank boys vowed -they would make Bull a presentation if he managed to do so. It was a -surprise to them when Bull fluked a ball past point, and another run -followed. Edgar determined to finish the game if possible, and a couple -of runs were got by a somewhat lucky stroke. This left three runs to -win, and the boys of both schools were in a fever of excitement. - -‘If Edgar can only manage to hit a three,’ said Will Brown, ‘then we -shall be all right. He’s done wonders, considering everything.’ - -The next ball Edgar could do nothing with. It puzzled him, and nearly -got past his bat. - -Then came a comparatively easy ball, and Edgar lifted it over the -ropes, amidst a perfect hurricane of cheers. This hit won the match, -and the Redbank boys rushed wildly over the ground and, surrounding -Edgar, bore him shoulder-high to the pavilion. It was a scene seldom -witnessed even on this famous school-ground, and as Edgar’s father -looked on he felt the moisture well up into his eyes, and his heart -beat with pride. He knew what this moment of triumph would mean to his -son, and he gloried in it. He made his way to the dressing-room, and as -he came the boys stood on one side and cheered him again and again. -They were proud of the father and proud of the son, and were not slow -to show it. - -‘Splendidly done, my lad!’ said Robert Foster, as he placed his -hand on Edgar’s shoulder. ‘It was a plucky, uphill fight, and your -schoolfellows are enthusiastic about it. I never saw you play a -steadier or better game.’ - -‘It was hard work,’ said Edgar, ‘but I did not feel a bit nervous. We -have won, but it was a narrow shave. I think it ought to have been an -easier victory had Rakes done his best.’ - -‘Then, you think Rakes behaved badly? I should give a boy like that a -wide berth.’ - -‘We are not friends,’ said Edgar, ‘but I bear him no animosity.’ - -The Redbank boys could do nothing but talk over their victory, and -Edgar Foster found they gave most of the credit to himself. - -Edgar gave Rakes to understand he believed he had tried to run him out. - -‘I may be wrong, but that is my opinion,’ said Edgar. - -‘Your opinion is worth nothing to me,’ said Rakes, ‘so you may keep it -to yourself.’ - -‘That may be,’ replied Edgar; ‘but the honour of the school ought to be -worth something to you. I shall not ask you to play again during the -time I am captain of the eleven.’ - - - - -CHAPTER IV. LEAVING SCHOOL. - - -The time arrived, all too soon, when Edgar Foster was to leave Redbank. -Unlike many lads, he was not eager to have done with lessons, and take -his place in the busy world. During his stay at Redbank he had made -many friends, Will Brown being an especial favourite with him. Dr. Hook -was proud of his scholar, for Edgar had done as well at work as at play. - -When the holiday time came round, Edgar Foster bade farewell to Redbank -with feelings of regret. As he looked back at the school he was leaving -he thought of the many happy hours he had spent within its walls. He -had gone through trial and struggle, such as every lad must encounter, -but they only made victory taste the sweeter. - -‘I shall feel quite lonely next term,’ said Will Brown, who was going -home with Edgar to spend a few days. ‘It’s lucky for some of us Rakes -is leaving, or he would have made it uncomfortably hot. I shall never -forget the thrashing you gave him. It did me good to see you punish -him;’ and Will Brown chuckled with delight at the mere thought. - -‘If I never have a harder battle to fight than that,’ said Edgar, ‘I -shall be lucky.’ - -‘What are you going to do?’ asked Will Brown. - -‘With my father’s permission I shall go to Australia,’ said Edgar. ‘You -know how fond I have always been of reading and learning about our -great colonies. I think it is a splendid thing to start life in a new -country, where you are not bound down by a lot of old-world prejudices.’ - -‘And what shall you do in Australia?’ asked Will Brown. - -‘I hardly know, but you may be sure I shall not remain idle very long. -There ought to be plenty for an active young fellow like me to do out -there.’ - -‘They are great cricketers, the Australians,’ said Brown. ‘You’re sure -to get into one of the best elevens, and that will help you along.’ - -‘And give me a chance of a trip home perhaps,’ said Edgar. ‘I should -hardly like playing against England.’ - -‘I expect you will become such an enthusiastic colonist that you will -be only too eager to assist in lowering the flag of old England on the -cricket-field.’ - -‘We shall see,’ replied Edgar. ‘Of one thing you may be quite sure: I -shall look upon Australia as my home if I have to earn my living there.’ - -Robert Foster was heartily glad to welcome his son’s schoolmate at Elm -Lodge. He was a believer in schoolboy friendships when judiciously made. - -Elm Lodge was not a large place, but it was old-fashioned and -picturesque, and overlooked the Thames near Twickenham. Robert Foster, -in addition to being a great cricketer, was a skilful oarsman, and -many a Thames waterman had found it a hard task to row with him. He was -also an enthusiastic fisherman, and knew the favourite haunts of the -famous Thames trout, and where many a good jack was to be found. There -was a boathouse at Elm Lodge, and Edgar always anticipated a good time -on the great river. - -Doris Foster was a bright, merry girl of seventeen, a perfect picture -of ruddy health, her cheeks untouched by any artificial beautifier. -Nature was her lady’s-maid, and Doris Foster would not have changed -her for the most skilful of tire-women. It was a difficult matter -to keep Doris Foster indoors, no matter how bad the weather might -be. She revelled in sunshine, but she loved the keen, sharp, frosty -air of winter, and the sound of the frozen snow crunching beneath -her tiny feet. She knew the names of the wild-flowers, and was well -acquainted with their haunts, and also their habits. She was not a -clever girl, but she was thoroughly domesticated, a far more desirable -accomplishment. Her father and brother were her best friends, and she -made but few new acquaintances. Doris Foster was a true-born English -girl, not a forced artificial production such as may be encountered -by the score in the Row, or the fashionable thoroughfares of the West -End. She had not learned to talk slang, and to consider it correct to -endeavour to make people think, ‘What a pity she is not a man!’ - -With the enthusiasm of a schoolboy, Will Brown adored Doris Foster. -There was no maudlin, sentimental love nonsense about his adoration. It -was the pure affection and liking a healthy youth feels for a healthy -girl. - -‘Excuse the expression, Edgar,’ he said one day, ‘but your sister is a -brick.’ - -The schoolboy ‘brick’ is synonymous for everything that is good. When -one lad calls another a ‘brick’ there’s a ring about the word that is -unmistakable. So, when Will Brown called his sister a brick, Edgar -Foster heartily endorsed the sentiment. - -‘I’d like to know,’ said Will, ‘if there is anything she cannot do?’ - -‘Several things,’ said Edgar. - -They were sitting in a boat close to the garden hedge, and passing -their time pleasantly enough. - -‘Enumerate some of them,’ said Will Brown incredulously. - -‘She cannot smoke,’ said Edgar solemnly; ‘nor can she make a speech. -She would be a ghastly failure as a woman politician, or a leader of -fashion. I am afraid she could not write a book, and drag all her -female friends through a moral pillory in it. Oh, there are heaps of -things Doris cannot do!’ - -‘And a jolly good thing, too!’ said Will Brown. ‘I hate stuck-up -girls--they’re worse than spoony girls. Now, your sister--well, a -fellow can make a chum of her, and all that, don’t you know.’ - -‘Comprehensive, certainly,’ laughed Edgar. ‘What does “all that, don’t -you know” mean?’ - -Will Brown waved his hand towards the flowing river, and was at a loss -for an answer. - -Splash! - -‘What’s that?’ said Will, as he shook the water off his boating-jacket. - -‘That is Miss “All that, don’t you know,”’ laughed Edgar. - -‘Where is she?’ said Will, jumping up, and narrowly missing overturning -the boat. - -‘In safety, on the other side of the hedge,’ said Edgar loudly. ‘She -dare not come nearer, for fear of the consequences.’ - -Splash! - -‘We had better get out of this,’ said Will. - -A merry peal of laughter sounded from the other side of the hedge. - -‘You lazy boys! I thought I would rouse you. Pull the boat round to the -steps, and take me for a row immediately.’ - -‘We decline to be ordered about,’ said Edgar. ‘Ask politely, and your -request may be granted.’ - -‘Will Mr. William Brown and Mr. Edgar Foster, of Redbank School--ahem! -College--have the goodness to row to the steps of Elm Lodge, where they -will find Miss Doris Foster at home?’ - -‘That’s much better,’ said Edgar. ‘Our compliments to Miss Doris -Foster, and we hasten to comply with her request.’ - -‘Pull, Edgar, you lazy beggar!’ said Will, ‘for Elm Lodge, home, and -beauty.’ - -Doris Foster looked charming in her light summer dress and large river -hat, as she stood on the steps leading from the lawn to the water. - -‘Your ladyship has showered many favours upon us of late,’ said Will -Brown, as he gave her his hand and she stepped into the boat; ‘in fact, -we are in danger of being overwhelmed with them.’ - -‘Doris, you ought not to throw stones,’ said Edgar, with an attempt to -be serious. - -‘I did not throw stones,’ said Doris. - -‘You hear her?’ said Edgar to Will. ‘She did not throw stones! I blush -for my sister.’ - -‘They were two half-bricks,’ said Doris. ‘Didn’t they splash!’ And she -laughed merrily. - -‘There’s prevarication!’ said Edgar. ‘A brick in this instance is to -all intents and purposes a stone.’ - -‘A brick is a brick,’ said Doris; ‘therefore it cannot be a stone.’ - -‘A brick is not a brick when it is only half a brick,’ said Edgar. - -‘If you don’t stop it,’ said Will Brown, ‘I’ll----Look out!’ he shouted. - -There was a bend in the river, and they did not see the small launch -until it was nearly on to them. The swirl she made in the water caused -their boat to dance up and down in the swell. - -‘All your fault,’ said Edgar to his sister. ‘But, thank goodness! it -has put an end to your argument.’ - -They had a pleasant row, and came back glowing with health, and very -hungry. Luncheon proved most acceptable, and was thoroughly enjoyed by -these young people with good appetites and no thoughts of indigestion. - -Doris Foster missed Will Brown when he left Elm Lodge, for she had come -to regard him as a sincere friend. She had, however, other things to -occupy her mind now, for Edgar was to sail for Australia in a couple -of months. She dreaded the parting with her brother, not only on her -own account, but because she knew how much her father would miss him. -She was half inclined to be angry with Edgar because he had chosen to -go abroad. At the same time, she admired the spirit of adventure that -tempted him away from a comparatively easy life in England. She knew if -she had been a man she would have followed her brother’s example. - -Robert Foster made the most of the time his son was to remain at home. - -‘I shall be sorry to part with you,’ he said to Edgar; ‘but you are -young, and I am not old. So I hope, ere many years have gone, we may -meet again. I believe it will do you good to go abroad. One thing you -must bear in mind: come home again if you do not like it.’ - -Edgar Foster was fond of the sea, and, as his father knew the owner of -one of the principal lines of sailing ships trading to Australia, he -had decided to make the voyage in the _Distant Shore_, a large vessel -holding a quick record. - -‘You are quite sure you prefer to go out in a sailing vessel?’ said -Robert Foster. ‘It will be a tedious voyage.’ - -‘I am sure the time will pass quickly,’ said Edgar. ‘I love the sea. -Those big steamers are too much like hotels, and I cannot bear hotel -life.’ - -‘Please yourself, my boy. The _Distant Shore_ is a fine vessel, and -Captain Manton a good seaman. He’ll look after you well, I feel sure.’ - -The weeks rolled all too quickly by, and the time drew near when the -_Distant Shore_ was to sail for Sydney. - -Edgar Foster paid a visit to Redbank, and was heartily welcomed by his -old schoolmates, who wished him a prosperous voyage and success in the -new country. Dr. Hook was very kind to him, and gave him some good -advice. - -As Edgar shook hands with him, Dr. Hook said: - -‘An old friend of mine once gave me what I consider good advice. He -said: “Don’t fret, keep your temper, and mind your own business.” If -you carry out his precepts, I think you will do well.’ - -Edgar did not feel in very good spirits when his last night at home -arrived. As he looked around the cosy room, he wondered how many years -it would be before he saw it again, and the dear ones he must leave -behind. He said to himself he must work hard and earn a good name, and -then he would come home and be received with open arms. - -His father was kinder than ever on this their evening of parting, and -Doris did all in her power to make things bright and cheerful. Edgar -never ceased to remember this particular night, and it came vividly -before him on many occasions when far away. - -Robert Foster and his daughter saw Edgar sail in the _Distant Shore_, -and waved him a tearful farewell. - -As Edgar stood looking at them he felt lonely, and when they gradually -receded from his sight he heaved a sigh, and felt a choking sensation -in his throat. - -When Robert Foster and Doris reached Elm Lodge again he kissed her -fondly, and said in a broken voice: - -‘God knows when we shall see him again, Doris. You are all I have left -now; you must not leave your father.’ - -‘Edgar will return some day,’ she said quietly. ‘I will take his place -until then. When he comes back you will forget all the sorrow of -parting.’ - - - - -CHAPTER V. A FURIOUS STORM. - - -Hundreds of people hurrying to business in Sydney at an early hour in -the morning cast anxious eyes at the dull leaden sky, across which -heavy clouds rolled, hanging over the harbour and the city. They also -gazed in wonderment, and with feelings not devoid of awe, upon a mass -of peculiar white clouds banked up in an exactly opposite direction to -the harbour. These clouds were of a fleecy whiteness, balloon-shaped, -and clung together until they were heaped almost mountains high. - -There was a peculiar stillness about the atmosphere--the calm that -usually precedes a storm. All day long the clouds hung suspended -overhead, and towards the middle of the afternoon it grew much darker. -People residing at harbour suburbs hurried home as fast as possible, -and were glad when they were ferried safely across the water. - -The Watson’s Bay ferry-boat was throwing off from the landing-stage as -a well-built man in a pilot’s coat jumped on board. - -‘Nearly missed it, Wal,’ said the skipper of the _Fairy_. ‘The next -boat will have a rough passage, I reckon.’ - -‘Yes; it’s been brewing all day,’ replied Walter Jessop. ‘We shall have -a terrible night, I fear. It will be dangerous near the coast to-night. -Luckily, there’s no vessel been sighted anywhere handy.’ - -The speaker was evidently a seaman. He had an honest, open face, -weather-beaten and tanned with exposure, and his hands were hard and -big and used to hard work. - -Pilot Jessop was well known in Sydney. In years gone by he had done -good service as a pilot, and he still followed his calling, but -fortune had favoured him in the shape of a windfall from a rich -relation, and he only took on work when he felt inclined. - -Walter Jessop knew the coast of Australia as well as any man, and he -had sailed up most of the harbours and rivers between Adelaide and -Normanton. Such a man was not likely to make many mistakes about the -weather, and he knew what these lowering clouds that had been hanging -about all day meant. - -The _Fairy_ was one of the smallest ferry boats on the harbour, and at -this time Watson’s Bay was not such an important place as it is now. -Pilot Jessop, however, found it handy to live at Watson’s Bay, as it -was under the great shadows of South Head, beyond which lay the open -sea. Many a ship had he piloted to a safe anchorage in the harbour. - -When the landing-stage was reached, he bade the skipper of the _Fairy_ -good-night, and walked to his home, which nestled in a sheltered -position high up above the harbour. - -A bright little woman, clad in a homely dress, gave him a hearty -welcome. Mrs. Jessop was just the wife for such a man, and they had -only one regret: they had no child to lavish their affection upon. - -‘We’re in for a storm,’ said Wal Jessop, as he was generally called. ‘I -hope there’s no vessel making for the harbour; they’d better keep away -from our coast to-night.’ - -‘I’m right glad you have no occasion to go to sea on such nights,’ said -his wife. ‘It would make an old woman of me before my time if you were -out in these storms.’ - -‘I weathered a good many storms before I met you,’ said Wal Jessop, -‘but I don’t feel much inclined for it again when I come to such -comfortable quarters as these.’ - -A low murmuring sound could be heard, a door banged, and the windows -creaked ominously. - -‘It’s coming,’ said Jessop. ‘Make everything snug, my lass; there’ll be -a perfect hurricane before morning.’ - -As Wal Jessop sat at the well-laden tea-table, he suddenly put down his -knife and fork, and drew a paper from his coat-pocket. - -‘I’d quite forgotten,’ he said. ‘I hope they’re not making for Sydney -in such a gale as this will be.’ - -‘What ship do you mean?’ asked his wife. - -‘The _Distant Shore_ is due here early next week. It’s Saturday, and -the agents expect her on Monday at the latest. I hope Captain Manton -has not made an extra quick passage. She’s a clipping sailer, is the -_Distant Shore_, and he’s a bit venturesome--likes to make a rapid run. -I shouldn’t wonder if she’s not far away to-night.’ - -‘I hope not,’ said Mrs. Jessop. - -Captain Manton often paid a visit to the Jessops when in Sydney, and -the pilot and his wife were very fond of his company. - -As the evening wore on the storm raged in all its fury. Every hour -seemed to add to the velocity of the gale. A great roar like distant -thunder could be heard in the cottage as the waves dashed against the -mighty rocks of South Head, and then rushed back, baffled and angry. - -‘It’s beginning to rain,’ said Wal Jessop; ‘I’ll just see if the pony’s -all right before it comes on faster.’ - -‘Be quick in again,’ said his wife, ‘or you’ll be drenched.’ - -A fierce gust came in as he opened the door and quickly shut it again. - -‘It doesn’t rain after all,’ he said, as he looked up at the dark -clouds through which the moon occasionally shone in fitful gleams. - -As if to convince him he had made a mistake, and that his first surmise -was correct, a shower of heavy drops fell upon him. He stood still and -thought for a moment; then he touched the wet on his coat and tasted -it. It was salt, and he knew the waves outside were running high and -dashing showers of salt spray over the top of the rocks, and the wind -carried it across the village. - -‘Such a sea is worth having a look at,’ he thought. ‘I’ll have a walk -up to the cliffs before I turn in.’ - -He told his wife it was the spray from the waves being dashed on the -rocks, and she knew it must be terrible out at sea. - -Walter Jessop could not rest. He felt uneasy, and had an undefinable -feeling that some dire catastrophe was about to take place. He sat down -and tried to read the evening paper, but nothing in it interested -him. His pipe continually went out because he was so deep in thought -he failed to draw sufficiently to keep it alight. His wife watched -him with anxious eyes. She had seen him like this before when he had -been affected by a presentiment of evil. He got up from his chair and -restlessly paced about the room. - -‘Have a glass of something,’ said his wife. ‘It’s getting on for -bedtime.’ - -‘Don’t mind if I do,’ he said. ‘I’ll tell you what it is, lass: I fear -there’ll be something awful happen before the night’s over.’ - -‘It’s the storm makes you feel like that,’ said his wife. ‘This will do -you good.’ And she handed him a glass of toddy. - -Wal Jessop drank it with evident relish. Then he looked at his watch, -and said: - -‘Ten o’clock. I’ll just go up on the cliffs, and have a look out to -sea; I’ll never rest if I don’t.’ - -‘If you say you’ll go I know you mean it,’ said his wife; ‘but do be -careful. You might get blown over the rocks.’ - -‘There’s a moon,’ he said; ‘and I’m more likely to be blown away from -the rocks than over them. I’ll not be gone long. You go to bed.’ - -He put on a thick coat and slouch hat, kissed his wife, and then went -out into the stormy night. - -‘If he fancies I’m going to bed until he comes home he’s mistaken,’ -said Mrs. Jessop to herself. ‘Oh, these sailors! A furious gale seems -to tempt them outside when other folk are only too anxious to hide -their heads under the bedclothes.’ - -Wal Jessop felt the full force of the wind as he made his way up a -narrow path towards the top of the cliff. He battled with it, and -seemed to take a fierce delight in overcoming it. A terrific gust -nearly swept him off his feet, and he muttered: - -‘Nearly had me that time, but I’ll beat the winds as I have done -before. There’s some satisfaction in fighting a gale like this, but I’d -sooner be doing it here than out at sea yonder.’ - -At last he reached the roadway, which he crossed, and then climbed up -again towards the top of the rocks. As he made his way slowly the salt -spray dashed into his face, and wetted him all over. He could hear the -waves thundering against the rocks, and every roar was followed by a -dense shower of spray. When he reached the top of the rocks the moon -came out from behind a cloud, and shed a pale light on the scene. - -Wal Jessop looked out to sea, and saw nothing but a black mass of -tumultuous water and fierce waves chasing each other in mad sport. Then -he looked down below and saw masses of foam tossed about and flung -high into the air. He saw the great waves roll across the jutting -rock, then dash furiously against the solid mass opposed to them, and -cast up spray like a waterspout. This battle between the waves and the -rocks had been going on for centuries, and would, he knew, continue -for centuries more. The waves, constantly baffled and defeated, had -to retreat, but they returned again and again to the charge, bringing -up reinforcements from their mighty reserves, until at last the rocks -seemed to give way inch by inch, and their jagged, worn fronts bore -unmistakable testimony to the fierceness of the onslaught. - -Pilot Jessop could not tear himself away from this scene of tumult and -fierce war. He stood alone upon the rocks, the spray drenching him, -and the wind whistling and whining in his ears. He knew there was a -warm bed awaiting him at home, and yet he could not leave the spot. He -peered out to sea, and saw an empty space. The moon was again hidden, -and all was black and desolate. Suddenly he started, and gave vent to -an exclamation. He thought he saw a tiny light sparkle far away out -in the gloom. He looked again and again, but could see nothing. Could -his eyes have deceived him? What could he have mistaken for a light -so far out at sea? There it was again. He could not mistake it this -time. There were two lights like stars; now he saw three. A cold, dull -feeling came over him, and froze the blood in his veins; his heart beat -loudly, and he put his hands to his head to think. - -Was it a ship out at sea and heading for the harbour on such a night as -this? Surely no captain would be so mad and foolish as to risk passing -through that narrow strait between the Heads in such a gale! He looked -again and again, and the more he looked the more he was convinced it -was a vessel being driven on to the rocks. He knew if it was a ship she -would be dashed into a thousand pieces and not a soul on board could be -saved. Hoping against hope, he looked again. The light had gone, and he -breathed more freely. His eyesight must have deceived him. - -He felt a tug at his sleeve, and turning quickly round, faced his wife. - -‘I could bear it no longer,’ she said; ‘you have been out over three -hours. The suspense was terrible. I thought you were blown over the -rocks. Come home, Wal, you are wet through.’ - -‘Three hours!’ he exclaimed, then, knowing how he had been compelled to -struggle to reach the rocks, he took his wife in his arms, strained her -to his breast, kissed her fondly, and said: - -‘You are a brave little woman, and I’m a brute for causing you anxiety. -We will go home at once. This is no fit place for you.’ - -‘Wal, Wal!’ she cried as she stared over his shoulder with wide, -terror-stricken eyes; ‘look, there’s a light; two lights, three! It’s a -ship! Lord have mercy on ’em!’ - -‘Good God, she’s seen it! Then my eyes have not deceived me. That’s -what I’ve been watching this hour,’ he said. - -They looked together out across the furious ocean, and saw the lights -plainly now. - -Mary Jessop hid her face on her husband’s shoulder and sobbed aloud. -She knew not a single man, woman, or child on the ill-fated vessel -could expect to live when the ship was shattered to pieces. As she -stood there in the rocks with the wind roaring around her, safe in her -husband’s strong arms, she offered up a prayer to the God who rules the -seas to save the ship from destruction. - -As for Pilot Jessop, he seemed for the moment incapable of action. He -quickly recovered, and said in a hollow voice: - -‘Suppose it’s the _Distant Shore_?’ - -His wife shuddered and said: - -‘Can nothing be done to save her?’ - -‘No, Mary; she’s beyond control. No captain would be here on such -a night if he had control of his ship. She’s helpless, and we are -helpless; but we can rouse the folk and do all we can. Come.’ - -They went down the rocky path and hurried to the village, where, -despite the gale, the people were sleeping soundly. - -They roused two or three men, and telling them to pass the word on, -they fought their way back to the top of the cliffs. - - - - -CHAPTER VI. THE ‘DISTANT SHORE.’ - - -The _Distant Shore_ made a quick voyage towards Australia, and her -captain felt sure of beating the sailing record by two or three days. -Captain Manton had taken a great liking to Edgar Foster, who spent many -a pleasant hour in his cabin with him. On this voyage Captain Manton -was accompanied by his wife and child, a bright little girl about three -years of age. The child was very fond of Edgar, and he played with the -little one on deck for hours at a stretch. - -‘I never remember a more favourable voyage,’ said the captain to Edgar -one morning; ‘we ought to be in Sydney harbour in the course of two or -three days. Looks as though we are going to finish with a squall,’ he -added, pointing to the restless clouds overhead. - -‘I am quite anxious to weather a storm before we get to our journey’s -end,’ said Edgar, smiling, ‘or I shall fancy I have not been to sea.’ - -‘Your wish is likely to be gratified,’ he said; ‘but the _Distant -Shore_ is a good ship, and it will be an uncommon bad storm she cannot -sail through safely.’ - -‘With a good ship and a clever captain we have not much to fear,’ said -Edgar. ‘Here’s little Eva coming for her morning romp. I should have -been quite lonely on board without her.’ - -Edgar held out his arms, and the child ran into them. He lifted her -above his head, where she laughed with delight, and looked at her -father with merry eyes. - -‘Pass her on to me,’ said Captain Manton; and Edgar tossed her into her -father’s arms. - -‘Back again,’ she cried, and she was tossed to Edgar again. - -The captain watched them for a few moments as they played on the deck, -and then cast an anxious look at the sky. He knew they were in for a -storm, probably a bad one. - -During the night Edgar heard the vessel creak and groan, and her -timbers strain in a most unusual manner. The sailors were hard at work -on deck, and he knew the storm must have burst upon them. He turned -over in his berth, and felt thankful the _Distant Shore_ was such a -safe vessel, and her captain a trustworthy seaman. - -Edgar had some difficulty in reaching the deck next morning. Not a -single passenger was in the saloon as he staggered through, holding on -first to one thing, and then another. - -‘You had better keep below, sir,’ said one of the stewards; ‘you’ll -stand a good chance of being blown overboard if you venture on deck. We -are finishing up with a real bad storm.’ - -‘That’s just what I want to see,’ said Edgar. - -‘You can’t get out that way,’ said the man; ‘the hatches are down. Come -this way, and I will show you how to get on deck.’ - -Edgar followed the man to the fore-part of the ship, and was well -knocked about during the journey. - -‘Go up there, and you’ll be able to see what it’s like before you go on -deck,’ said the steward. - -‘Just as well to look before I leap, I suppose,’ said Edgar. - -‘I don’t think you’ll want to leap on deck when you have had a look -out,’ was the reply. - -Edgar climbed up the steep steps, holding on with all his might. When -he reached the top he saw there was a thick glass with bars across it. -He could see well enough through the glass, and the sight almost took -away his breath. - -A huge wave towered high above the ship, and Edgar thought if it came -over the deck the vessel must surely go down. The _Distant Shore_ gave -a mad plunge, and he nearly lost his foothold. The ship seemed to dive -down into the depths of the sea, and then, coming up again, shook -herself all over. On second thoughts Edgar decided to remain where he -was, or rather down below in the saloon. Captain Manton entered a few -minutes after Edgar succeeded in finding his way back. - -‘Well, my lad, you’ve got a storm at last,’ said the captain; ‘I hope -you are satisfied. My wife and Eva are in their cabin, and I don’t -think they are quite so pleased as you are about the weather. It will -get worse before it mends.’ - -‘Worse?’ said Edgar. ‘Why, it’s blowing a regular hurricane, and the -sea is running as high as the ship.’ - -‘How did you find that out?’ said Captain Manton. ‘I gave orders no one -was to be allowed on deck.’ - -Edgar explained, and the captain was satisfied. - -‘So you did not like the look of things?’ he asked. - -‘No,’ said Edgar. ‘I think I am safer here, although I confess I feel a -little queer.’ - -Captain Manton smiled as he replied: - -‘Sea-sickness will soon cure you of a longing for storms. I’d advise -you to turn in before you have to be carried to your berth.’ - -‘Oh, it’s not so bad as that,’ said Edgar. ‘It will pass off.’ - -‘No doubt,’ said the captain with a meaning smile. - -All that day the storm raged, and the _Distant Shore_ battled with -it. As night came on, Captain Manton became anxious. He knew they -were nearing the coast of New South Wales, and the wind was driving -them straight in that direction. He tried in vain to alter the ship’s -course, but he could not keep out to sea; some uncontrollable current -appeared to drive the vessel along. As the night wore on there were no -signs of the storm abating; in fact, the gale was worse than ever. - -A terrible crash made everyone on board quake. A huge sea dashed over -the ship, sweeping her deck well-nigh clear. The boats were smashed to -atoms; two sailors were washed overboard, and Captain Manton was dashed -against his cabin and almost stunned. Before the _Distant Shore_ could -right herself another merciless sea swept over her, and at the same -moment the rudder chain snapped, and the vessel swung helplessly round. - -Captain Manton at once realized the danger they were in. By the fitful -light of the moon he saw the terrible havoc the waves had made on deck. -Then he saw something that made his heart quail; it was the flashing of -the light from South Head lighthouse. Well might a brave man tremble at -the thought of being dashed to pieces on those great rocks. His ship -was no longer under control, and he could do nothing to save her from -being driven to destruction. Had the steering gear held firm he might -have tried to dash through the Heads into the harbour. That would have -been a mere chance; but even this, small as it was, had gone. Despair -seized upon him, and held him in chains; but he burst the bonds at the -thought of the lives of those on board. They were still some distance -from the Heads; the light flashed out many miles to sea. He must -prepare them as quietly as possible to await their fate. - -Leaving the mate in charge of the vessel, he went below. He made for -Edgar’s cabin and entered without knocking. - -Edgar was wide awake and dressed, and he knew there must be something -wrong when he saw the captain. - -‘What is it?’ said Edgar. ‘Any danger?’ and he tumbled out of his berth. - -‘You are a brave lad,’ said Captain Manton, ‘and I have come to you -first. There is no time to lose. We are in deadly peril. I have no -control over the ship, and we are being blown straight for the rocks.’ - -‘What can I do?’ said Edgar. - -He was pale, but perfectly calm. - -‘Very little,’ said Captain Manton; ‘but you can set a good example. A -panic will only make matters worse. If the passengers are kept under -control, it may be possible to save some of them. Will you call them up -in the saloon cabin? Tell them to dress, and try and calm them. I will -tell my wife and take her and Eva up with me. You will find them in my -cabin. If it comes to the worst, do what you can for them. I must stick -to the ship. I’ll save her if I can, but I see no chance at present. -Good-bye!’ - -He held out his hand and Edgar gripped it hard. They looked firmly into -each other’s eyes. They were not afraid of facing death. Edgar seemed -to have grown older, and Captain Manton saw the look of determination -on his face and thought to himself: - -‘This lad will not fail me. He will give his life to save those I love.’ - -‘Good-bye,’ said Edgar, and without another word he went to rouse his -fellow-passengers. - -So well did he accomplish his difficult task that, although the peril -they were in was understood, there was no panic. Happily there were -very few women and children on board, and the men behaved well. - -It was an awful sight, Edgar thought: the saloon filled with people -hastening to their death, awaiting the summons from the captain, ‘All -hands on deck,’ which meant they were to sell their lives as dearly as -possible. The very suddenness of the danger appeared to have taken all -sense of fear away. Not a word was spoken; the sobbing of children, -and the half-smothered, heart-rending groan of some poor mother, could -alone be heard. - -A great rush of wind, followed by a loud shout, aroused them: - -‘All hands on deck!’ - -Edgar led the way, and then stood by while the women and children were -helped up the stairs. The men followed. Edgar was the last to leave the -saloon. Once on deck he saw what their danger was, and from whence it -came. The lighthouse stood high up on the rocks, flashing across the -sea, and they were so near now that the rays lighted up the faces of -those in deadly peril on the doomed ship. Edgar forced his way towards -the captain’s cabin, and found Mrs. Manton and Eva crouching down, -overcome with fear. He spoke a few words of encouragement, and little -Eva looked up into his face with wistful eyes. - -Then Edgar looked round the ship as the light flashed on it again. He -saw pale, blanched faces all round him, men clinging in desperation to -ropes and bars, and women holding their children fast, themselves held -by strong men’s disengaged arms. It was an awful sight, but Edgar felt -no fear for himself as he looked at it. He thought of the grand voyage -they had gone through, and how near they were to their destination. -The good ship was struggling on, and after going these thousands of -miles was to be dashed to pieces at the very entrance to the harbour -of safety. His mind wandered to those at home, and he seemed to see his -father and sister sitting in the dear old room at Elm Lodge, as on that -last night in the home he loved so well. Their voices seemed to ring in -his ears, giving him hope and encouragement. He smiled faintly as he -imagined he could hear his father say: - -‘You’re in a tight fix, my lad, but never despair; be brave and fight -to the end.’ - -A loud cry of despair echoed through the night. It was wafted to the -watchers on the rocks, who stood there helpless, unable to lend a hand -to save the men and women going to sure destruction. Again it rose -above the roar of the sea, and Edgar shuddered as he heard it. - -Well might the doomed ones cry aloud. To the right of them, not many -yards away, yawned a large opening between the gigantic rocky Heads. -Through that opening lay safety and rest, and yet no power on earth -could drive the _Distant Shore_ through it. Facing them was another -gap, but there was no opening there; the solid rock rose straight out -of the sea. On came the _Distant Shore_ through the boiling, seething -mass of waters. - -Captain Manton stood at his post. Once he cast his eyes in the -direction of his cabin, and a satisfied smile played over his face as -he saw Edgar there. - -‘My life for theirs, O God!’ he cried. - -He was not a man given to many prayers, but he believed his cry would -be heard. - -Edgar looked ahead. He saw the vessel heaved high upon the waves; he -saw the merciless rock in front. There was not a moment to spare. He -rushed into the cabin. - -‘Give me Eva,’ he said. ‘You will have a better chance alone.’ - -The mother pressed her child to her heart and smothered her with kisses. - -Edgar snatched the child away and sprang out of the cabin. At the same -moment there was a terrific crash, a rending and splitting of timbers, -cries and groans, shrieks for help, and strange, unearthly sounds. - -Edgar, with the child firmly clasped in his arms, was hurled against -the side of the vessel. He felt it give way, and as he glanced round he -saw the ship shattered into a thousand pieces, and great timbers hurled -high into the air. Then he felt the water rush over him, he was lifted -off his feet and flung into the furious waves, with little Eva still -clasped firm in his arms. - - - - -CHAPTER VII. WHAT THE MORNING BROUGHT FORTH. - - -And what of the watchers on South Head? Wal Jessop’s summons had been -obeyed, and a small knot of men, and one or two women, stood looking -out to sea at the doomed ship. - -‘What is she, Wal?’ said one man. ‘Do you know her name?’ - -‘Not for certain; but I’m afraid it’s the _Distant Shore_,’ replied -Jessop. - -‘Captain Manton? I hope not,’ was the reply. - -‘She’s helpless,’ said Jessop. ‘There’s no control over that ship. It’s -awful! Here we are, and cannot lend a helping hand. No boat could live -in such a sea; no man could swim near those rocks.’ - -They saw the ship lifted upon the top of the waves, and then sink out -of sight again. The large vessel was no more to the merciless sea than -a mere cork. - -‘It will not be many minutes now,’ said Jessop to his wife; and she -shuddered, and stepped back from the cliffs. ‘Go home, Mary,’ he said; -‘this is no place for you.’ - -‘I’ll face it now I’m here,’ she said; ‘the crash will be awful. Can -nothing be done to save them?’ - -‘Nothing,’ he replied. ‘We must wait and see what the morning brings -forth; the sea may have gone down by then. There’s very little hope -that anyone will be saved.’ - -They crowded dangerously near the edge of the cliffs, and strained -their eyes in the direction of the ship. - -Suddenly the vessel shot upright under them, deep down below. She was -heaved forward with tremendous force on the waves, and then came the -crash, which seemed to shake the rock upon which they stood. It was an -awful sound, this rending of timbers, the grinding and splitting to -pieces of a fine ship, with her living freight, within a few yards of -the harbour. - -Cries came up from this abyss and made strong men tremble and weep. -Cries for help, and they could not help, although there was not a man -amongst them but would have risked his life cheerfully had he thought -there was the slightest hope of saving those on board. - -They heard the ship grinding on the rocks, they heard groans and -shrieks, and in a few moments there came an awful stillness. Even the -waves seemed awed by this terrible disaster, and there was a lull in -the storm. The wind dropped quickly and moaned dismally. - -Wal Jessop lay flat down, and, while a man held his legs, peered into -the depths below, but he could see nothing but the white foam from the -waves. There was not a trace of the vessel, so far as he could make out. - -‘We must wait till morning, but it’s weary work,’ he said. ‘Would to -God we could do something to help them! They’re beyond help now, I’m -afraid. Poor Manton!’ - -‘Then, you feel sure it’s the _Distant Shore_?’ - -‘I have a presentiment it is. She’s due shortly, and Manton always -liked to make a quick passage. If it is the _Distant Shore_, it will be -the last trip he will ever make,’ said Jessop. - -‘What shall we do as soon as it’s light?’ - -Wal Jessop was always the man addressed; the others recognised him as -the guiding hand in this trouble. - -‘We must have ropes ready,’ he said. ‘I’m going down the rocks as soon -as it’s light.’ - -‘No, no,’ said his wife; ‘you must not, Wal. It will mean death to you, -and then to me. If the rope broke you would be dashed to pieces. Wait -until you can row round through the Heads.’ - -‘Nay, my lass,’ he said kindly; ‘even if the gale drops, the sea will -be too rough for any boat to reach the rocks below. I must go down. -There’ll be no danger, with a stout rope and sturdy arms to hold me. -Think of it, lass--I might save a life. It’s worth the risk, if only -for the chance.’ - -She knew it would be useless to try and dissuade him; but she -determined to remain and watch. - -It was weary work waiting for the light to come. Ropes had been -procured, and a heavy crowbar driven firmly down. - -‘No danger of them breaking,’ said Wal Jessop as he handled the ropes. -‘You must keep the rope well away from the rock as you lower me down; -if it frays on a jagged sharp edge it might break.’ - -At last daylight began to appear, and in these climes there is not long -to wait before it is quite light. - -As the men looked over the cliffs they could see no sign of any living -creature. Spars and timbers had been dashed upon the rocks, and -remained there, but they were the only signs of the wreck. - -‘If timber can lodge there,’ said Jessop, ‘maybe some poor fellow has -managed to be cast up out of reach of the waves. Make ready quickly; we -must lose no time.’ - -The men set to work with a will. The stoutest rope was not long enough -to reach to the foot of the rocks, and another long one had to be -fastened on. The end was made fast to the iron bar, bags were put along -the edge of the cliff to prevent the rope fraying, and, when Wal Jessop -had inspected everything, and found all right, he tied the rope round -his waist, and stood ready to make the descent. It was a perilous task, -for the wind was still high and the face of the rocks dangerous, having -so many sharp projections against which he might be knocked as he was -lowered down. - -He kissed his wife, and bade her think only of the duty he had to -perform; and if there was a spice of danger in it, why, so much the -better, and the more credit to a man for undertaking it. - -‘You ought to be proud I’m going to do it,’ he said; ‘there’s not a -man here who does not envy me the job, and would like to take it on -himself.’ - -‘That’s so,’ said one of the men. ‘It’s because we have such respect -for your husband that we’re letting him have first turn. If he wants to -go down a second time, I reckon there’ll be a dispute about it.’ - -Wal Jessop crawled to the edge of the rocks, and then, taking a firm -hold of the rope, slipped quickly over. Two men held the rope near -the edge, the others were behind, and one man stood watching Jessop, -giving the signal when to stop and when to lower. - -The wind was blowing strong from the sea, and it took Wal Jessop all -his time to keep himself clear of the rocks. He dared not push off with -his feet because the wind swung him back violently. He was bruised and -scratched, and his clothes were torn, when he reached a rock above the -level of the waves, and signalled to stop lowering. - -‘He’s down,’ said the man giving orders to the others, ‘and in a safe -place, too.’ - -Mary Jessop felt thankful for this, but she would not be at rest until -her husband reached the top again. - -Wal Jessop unfastened the rope and left it dangling. He then sat down -and looked around him. Those above could merely see a small figure -contemplating the scene. On all sides there was ample evidence of a -wreck, but it seemed to Wal Jessop the vessel had been shattered to -atoms. - -‘Not much chance of anyone being saved,’ he thought sadly. ‘How could -they be dashed against these rocks and live?’ - -He scrambled along from rock to rock and found very little. A hat -or a coat he came across, lodged high up on some projection. There -was plenty of timber and odds and ends, but not a sign of any living -soul. He searched in one direction, towards the Heads, for about an -hour, and then began to make his way in the opposite direction. It was -hard work, for the sea was still rough and the wind high, and it was -difficult for him to obtain a firm foothold on the slippery slabs and -slanting rocks. - -He was about to give up his search, when he caught sight of something -white lying on a high level piece of rock some distance away. - -‘Wonder what that is?’ he thought. ‘A white jacket, or something of the -sort, I expect. Anyhow, now I am here, I may as well go and see.’ - -He scrambled along, and as he neared the object that had attracted his -attention, his heart began to beat fast. The white garment he fancied -covered a human form. Could it be possible? Had some poor fellow been -cast up by the sea on to a ledge of safety? He hurried on, in the hope -that after all he might be able to save a human life. What a feeling of -exultation comes over a man when he snatches a fellow-creature from the -jaws of death! Wal Jessop had saved men’s lives before this time, but -he was anxious to save someone from this fearful wreck if possible. - -As he struggled on over the uneven rocks, he saw that the ledge upon -which the white object lay was out of the reach of the waves. His -practised eyes saw at a glance that, if a man had been cast up on to -this ledge, he would not be washed back by the receding waves. He -reached the foot of the rock, and found it a difficult matter to get -up the side. He walked round and found a better foothold on the other -side. It was not long before he reached the top, and there he saw a -sight that brought tears to his eyes. - -Stretched on the rock lay a youth, calm and still--so still that Wal -Jessop thought him dead. It was a comely face he looked upon, a face he -knew would be fair, indeed, if life still remained to bring back light -to the closed eyes. Clasped in the left arm of the youth was a child, -and she also lay insensible. - -Wal Jessop looked down upon them with great sorrow in his heart. - -‘A brave lad this,’ he thought. ‘He must have fought hard to save that -little lass--a brave lad, indeed, to risk his life for a little child.’ - -He stooped over them. He had a flask of brandy in his coat-pocket. -He placed his hand on the youth’s heart and felt there was a slight -pulsation. He could not resist a loud cry of joy. - -‘He’s alive yet!’ he shouted. Then he felt the child’s heart. Yes, it -still beat faintly. - -‘Both alive!’ he cried. ‘Thank God, they may be saved!’ - -He forced some brandy into the youth’s mouth, and a few drops he gave -to the child. Then he pulled off his coat, wrapped the little girl in -it, and began to rub the youth’s limbs and body to try and restore -animation. - -‘Not a case of half-drowned,’ he said. ‘They’ve been thrown up on to -this ledge and stunned. They must have been insensible for some hours. -He’s got a nasty cut at the back of his head, and the little one has a -big bruise on her temple.’ - -After rubbing the youth’s hand for some time Wal Jessop saw signs of -returning life. The sight gladdened him, and he redoubled his efforts. -Presently he heard a faint sigh, the youth’s eyes opened, and he gazed -wildly about him as though thinking of and looking for something. In a -few minutes he gasped: - -‘The child! Little Eva--where----’ - -‘Safe, my lad. She’s here,’ said Wal Jessop. - -A satisfied smile passed over the youth’s face, and he sank again into -insensibility. - -‘A brave lad,’ muttered Wal Jessop again. ‘Thinks of naught but the -saving of that little one.’ - -A faint cry made him turn his head, and he saw a movement under his -coat. - -‘The warmth has brought her round,’ he thought. ‘I’ll attend to her -first. He won’t come round again yet awhile.’ - -He took up the girl and she opened her eyes wide. - -‘Where is I?’ she lisped. ‘Where’s my daddy and my mammy? Where’s Eddy? -Who is you?’ Then, as she caught sight of the sea and the rocks, she -began to cry. - -‘I’ll take care of you, my lamb,’ said Wal Jessop. ‘Eddy’s -asleep--look.’ - -The girl looked at him and said quickly: - -‘No wake him. Eddy very tired. He carried me long way.’ - -‘Then, I’ll take you home and come back for him,’ said Wal. ‘Give me a -kiss, little one.’ - -She put up her face and he kissed her tenderly. Then he took her up -in his arms and carried her as gently as possible over the rocks back -towards the rope. Tired and worn out, the child was soon fast asleep. - -‘That’s well,’ said Wal Jessop as he hurried on; ‘she’ll not be -frightened as we are hauled up. There’ll be something for Mary to do -here. We’ve no young one of our own. Perhaps we are to have this one -from the sea. We’ll see about it when the lad can tell us all.’ - -When Wal Jessop reached the rope he gave a loud hallo, and held up the -sleeping child. He could hear the ringing cheers from those on the top. - -Having made the rope fast and tied the child firmly round the waist, he -gave the signal to haul up, and soon reached the top without any mishap. - -‘Here, lass, there’s a present for you,’ said Wal, as he laid the -sleeping child in his wife’s arms. - -Mary Jessop kissed it fondly, and could find no words to express her -feelings. - -‘There’s a lad down yonder,’ said Wal Jessop. ‘I must go back for him. -You take the child home, Mary. I’ll not be long. There’s no danger. -It’s a safe trip. I’ve been once, and I know the way. Now, lads, lower -me down again, and we’ll soon have the young fellow up here. He’s a -fine-looking chap, and I’m glad I’m the one to rescue him. Lower away, -boys!’ - - - - -CHAPTER VIII. IN WAL JESSOP’S COTTAGE. - - -When Wal Jessop reached Edgar Foster--for it was our hero who had been -so miraculously saved from sudden death--he found him sitting with his -back to the rock, and gazing out to sea with wistful eyes. Edgar smiled -faintly as he approached, and held out his hand, which Wal Jessop -seized in a hearty clasp. Edgar began to talk, but Wal Jessop told him -not to excite himself, and to leave anything he had to say until they -were safe and sound on the top of the rocks. - -‘The little one is safe,’ said Wal. ‘It was easy enough to take her up, -but it will be more difficult with you, and I shall want you to help me -all you can.’ - -‘I’ll do my best,’ said Edgar, ‘but I feel very weak. What an awful -night it was!’ And he shuddered as he spoke. - -‘You’ll be able to tell me about it later on,’ said Wal Jessop. ‘Try -and walk a bit; put your arm round my neck, and lean on me heavily.’ - -Edgar managed to stand on his feet, but he felt so weak he almost fell -down again. However, he succeeded in dragging along, with Wal Jessop’s -assistance, as far as the dangling rope. Edgar saw how long it was, and -said: - -‘Will it bear us both? You ought not to run any risk.’ - -It’s strong enough to hold an elephant,’ said Wal; ‘and there’s plenty -of good sturdy fellows on top to haul us up.’ - -Without further delay he proceeded to make preparations for the ascent. -He tied the rope firmly under Edgar’s arms, then made a loop lower down -in which he could fix his feet. When Wal had put his feet in the loop, -Edgar put his feet on the top of Wal Jessop’s, and, facing each other, -they were ready to be hauled up. Wal Jessop also had his arms round -Edgar, in case the rope was not sufficient support for him. - -‘Do you feel firmly fixed?’ said Wal. - -‘Yes,’ replied Edgar; ‘but it will be a stiffish pull for those on the -top.’ - -‘Never you fear!’ said Wal. ‘They’ll manage it. It’s what they have -been at all their lives, hauling in ropes either on board or ashore.’ - -He gave the signal, and they commenced slowly to ascend. - -It was with a hearty cheer the men hauled them out of danger, and when -Wal Jessop and Edgar stood on the top of the rock the good fellows -capered with delight like so many schoolboys. They surrounded Edgar, -and were so boisterous in their expressions of goodwill towards him, -that Wal Jessop felt he ought to interpose, or else the excitement -would be too much for the lad. - -‘Hold hard, boys!’ he shouted, forcing them back. ‘This is my prize, -and I’m going to carry him off home. A rest will do him good, and we -shall hear all about his escape later on.’ - -‘What ship was it?’ asked one of the men. - -‘The _Distant Shore_,’ said Edgar sadly. - -‘And the skipper?’ - -‘Lost--all lost, I am afraid, but myself and the little one,’ said -Edgar. - -Good-natured Wal Jessop, wishing to prevent more painful questions, -hurried Edgar Foster away from the scene as quickly as he could walk. - -‘Where are we going to?’ asked Edgar. - -‘My cottage,’ said Wal. ‘The wife has taken the young one, and has -probably put her in bed ere this.’ - -‘You are very kind to us,’ said Edgar. - -‘I shouldn’t be much of a man if I didn’t do all I could for you,’ said -Wal. ‘I’ll bet you’d have done as much for me.’ - -‘I should have done my best,’ said Edgar. - -‘I know it, lad, and therefore there is all the more pleasure in -helping you. Mind the path here, it’s a bit rough and steep,’ said Wal. - -When they reached Wal Jessop’s cottage, Edgar felt exhausted, and sank -helplessly into the easy-chair Mrs. Jessop placed ready for him. Tears -stood in her eyes as she looked at Edgar’s youthful face, and thought -of those who would mourn him as lost until they learned the truth. - -‘Poor lad!’ she said in a whisper to Wal. ‘He’s worn out, and no -wonder. You must get him into bed, and I’ll make something hot for him.’ - -‘He’ll be best there,’ said Wal. ‘Here goes!’ - -He lifted Edgar out of the chair, and carried him into a small bedroom. -He helped him off with his clothes, such as they were, all ragged and -torn, and wrapped him in the blankets. Mrs. Jessop brought him a bowl -of beef-tea and bread, and after Edgar had done justice to it, he fell -into a sound sleep. - -‘Wonder who he is?’ said Mrs. Jessop. ‘He’s a fine lad.’ - -‘And a brave one,’ said Wal. ‘He’ll sleep a good many hours, I guess. -I’ll go up to Sydney by the boat, and give what information I can about -the wreck. I’ll hurry back as quickly as possible. If he asks for me, -tell him I shall not be long away. Where’s the child?’ - -Mrs. Jessop, with her finger on her lips to ensure silence, noiselessly -opened their bedroom door. - -Fast asleep in his own bed Wal Jessop saw the child he had rescued from -a cruel death. How calm and peaceful she lay; not a thought of trouble -haunted her as she slept! One tiny hand peeped out from the coverlet, -and Wal Jessop could not resist covering it with his large hand. The -little one returned the pressure, but did not awake. - -‘I wish she belonged to us,’ he said to his wife. - -‘So do I,’ was her reply. ‘Who knows but what she may do, if she has -lost her father and mother?’ - -‘We shall find out all about them when I return,’ he said. ‘Rest is -what they want now, poor things. I’ll bring some clothes back for him. -You can get the little one some when you go out. It will be a bit of -fresh shopping for you,’ he added with a smile that brought the colour -into his wife’s cheeks. - -When Wal Jessop reached Sydney, he found everyone in a state of -excitement about the wreck, so many different accounts having been -given by irresponsible persons. But he did not stay to gratify mere -idle curiosity. He went direct to the offices of the Marine Board, and -gave all the evidence he could about the wreck of the _Distant Shore_. -His story was listened to with rapt attention, for Wal Jessop was a man -who could be depended upon in all he did or said. - -At the conclusion of his story, Captain Fife, President of the Board, -complimented him upon his bravery, and asked him to bring the youth he -had rescued to the offices of the Board as soon as he was in a proper -state to give his version of the disaster. - -‘By the way, what sort of a lad is he, Jessop?’ asked Captain Fife. - -‘If looks go for anything, he’s one of the right sort,’ said Wal; ‘and -that he’s brave goes without saying, after what I have told you.’ - -‘Then, I dare say I can find him something to do,’ said Captain Fife; -‘that is, I mean, if he has no friends out here to help him.’ - -‘I’m sure it is very kind of you,’ said Wal. ‘I don’t know who or what -he is, at present; but he’s been brought up a cut above me, I guess.’ - -‘That may be,’ said Captain Fife, smiling; ‘but if he turns out as good -a man as Wal Jessop, his father will have reason to be proud of him.’ - -Wal Jessop’s honest face shone with pleasure at this remark, and he -said: - -‘If I can be of any use to him, he’s welcome to all I know about -Australia.’ - -‘And that is more than most of us,’ said Captain Fife. ‘He is in good -hands, at any rate. Bring him here as soon as you can.’ - -Wal Jessop made the best of his way home. He avoided the busy shipping -quarters, but was waylaid by several of his acquaintances, who knew he -could tell them more about the wreck than anyone. The pressmen were -also on his track, and, in order to quiet them, Wal Jessop gave them a -short account of what had occurred. - -‘It’s not all I know,’ he said at the conclusion of his remarks; ‘but -it is quite enough for you chaps with vivid imaginations to work upon. -I reckon, when I read the accounts, they’ll be equal to anything that -could have been strung together on the spot. Some of you have fathered -stirring yarns on to me before now. Give me a rest this time, and I’ll -forgive you.’ - -‘We can’t let you off so easily, Wal,’ said one pressman. ‘If I don’t -get your photo for my paper I shall have to find another shop to work -in.’ - -‘You’ll get no photo from me,’ said Wal. ‘I’m not a particularly -good-looking man, but I draw the line at those outrages in your paper, -Billy.’ - -When Wal Jessop arrived home, he found Edgar had just awoke out of a -refreshing sleep, for which he felt much better. - -‘I have brought you some new clothes,’ said Wal; ‘your garments were -rather knocked about with rough usage. How do you feel now, my lad?’ - -‘Excepting the pain in my head, I am all right,’ said Edgar. ‘It is -very good of you to purchase me clothes. I have lost all I had on board -the ship. I put a draft in my coat-pocket, but I had to get rid of my -coat to save our lives. I must let my father know I am saved, as he -will be anxious about me when he hears of the wreck.’ - -‘I’ll send a cablegram,’ said Wal. ‘We can manage to advance you cash -enough,’ he added, smiling. ‘Now put on your clothes and come and have -a chat with the lassie.’ - -‘She’s a dear little child,’ said Edgar, ‘and the captain’s daughter.’ - -‘Poor Manton!’ said Wal; ‘I fancied as much. She’s got the look of her -father about her.’ - -When Edgar appeared in the cosy room, he saw Eva quietly sitting on -Mrs. Jessop’s knees. The child cried out, and slipping down, toddled -towards him, holding out both hands. - -Edgar clasped her in his arms and kissed her fondly. - -‘Poor little Eva,’ he said. ‘I promised to save you if I could, and, -now I have done so, I will look after you.’ - -Eva commenced to prattle in her childish way, and asked for her mother. - -‘She’s gone a long way off,’ said Edgar. ‘You will stay with me, won’t -you, dear?’ - -‘Yes. Stay till mamma comes back,’ said Eva. ‘Where’s daddy?’ - -‘Gone with mamma,’ said Edgar. ‘He said you must be a good girl.’ - -‘Always good girl with Eddy,’ she said, snuggling up against him. - -This was more than Mrs. Jessop’s motherly heart could stand, and she -beat a hasty retreat. - -‘Me go too,’ said Eva; and Edgar let her patter after Mrs. Jessop. - -‘Now,’ said Wal Jessop, ‘we may as well introduce ourselves. I’m Pilot -Walter Jessop, and am as well known along this coast as a good many -sailors.’ - -‘Edgar Foster is my name,’ said Edgar, who proceeded to relate how -it came about he was on board the _Distant Shore_. He also told Wal -Jessop about his school-days and life at home. Wal Jessop was a man who -inspired confidence, and Edgar felt it would be good for him to make a -friend of the man who had rescued him from a watery grave. - -‘We had a splendid passage,’ said Edgar, ‘until we were somewhere off -the coast of Tasmania, I believe. It was then the storm commenced to -brew, and Captain Manton became anxious. We could not have had a -better skipper, and no blame can be attached to him for the loss of the -ship. It was a pure accident. The rudder chains snapped at a critical -moment, and the ship was not under control. It was a terrible time, and -I shall never forget it. Captain Manton asked me to do what I could -to save his wife and child, as he had to try and look after the ship -and those on board. The last I saw of him he was standing as cool and -collected as though sailing calmly into port. What the agony of his -mind must have been I fail to imagine. When the crash came I snatched -Eva from Mrs. Manton’s arms, and directly afterwards I was hurled -against the side of the vessel, and the support almost immediately gave -way. I was pitched into the seething waves, with the child in my arms. -For a moment I was stunned, but when the dazed feeling passed I caught -hold of a floating spar, which I managed to grasp with one hand and to -hold Eva with my other arm. The child was insensible from the shock, -and luckily for us she did not know what happened. - -‘After a few minutes I scrambled on the spar, which was tossed up and -down by the waves in a fearful manner. I expected every moment would -be my last, and that we should be dashed to pieces on the rocks. How -we escaped is really marvellous, and God must have been very near us -at that time. One huge wave lifted the spar on to the rocks, and as I -felt it roll backwards I slipped off and clung to a jagged edge of -rock. Another wave came rushing over us, and must have rolled me higher -up the rocks, for I remember nothing more until I saw you bending over -me. I can hardly realize I am saved, and can still hear the roar of the -waves, and seem to feel the water dashing over me.’ - -‘When you see the place where you were cast up by the sea,’ said Wal, -‘you will wonder still more that you were not dashed to pieces. I see -you are tired now. In the morning we can talk over what is best to be -done.’ - - - - -CHAPTER IX. UP COUNTRY. - - -Edgar Foster accompanied Wal Jessop to Sydney, in order to give -evidence before the Marine Board as to the cause of the disaster to -the _Distant Shore_. He found he was the cynosure of all eyes on the -ferry-boat, for the morning papers had given a glowing account of his -bravery in saving Eva. - -Wal Jessop felt proud of the fine lad by his side, who had so quickly -recovered from his exertions, and seemed to have almost forgotten the -horrors of the wreck in looking at the beautiful scene he now saw for -the first time. - -As the ferry-boat left the landing-stage at Watson’s Bay, Wal Jessop -pointed out the narrow passage through the Heads, and Edgar saw with -wondering eyes how near the ill-fated ship had been to the harbour of -refuge. - -‘If we could only have been driven through that passage instead of on -to the rocks,’ said Edgar, ‘we might all have been alive now.’ - -‘It was a terrible thing to go down so near home,’ said Wal Jessop. -‘This is one of the best and safest harbours in the world.’ - -‘I have heard a good deal about it,’ said Edgar, smiling, ‘but I am not -surprised at the enthusiastic way in which people praise its beauties. -All I have heard or read gave me a very faint idea of the reality, -which is far beyond any expectation I had formed.’ - -‘I’m glad to hear that,’ replied Wal Jessop. ‘People at times are apt -to consider we “blow” too much about our harbour.’ - -‘Too much praise cannot be bestowed upon a scene like this,’ said Edgar. - -When they arrived at Circular Quay, Wal Jessop took his companion -to the Marine Board offices, where he left him, and went to send a -cablegram to Edgar’s father. - -Edgar gave his account of the wreck in a manner that at once won the -respect of Captain Fife and the members of the Board. He modestly put -his own courageous conduct in the background, and spoke of Captain -Manton in such a manner that it left no doubt upon the minds of his -hearers that everything had been done that was possible to save the -ship. Edgar’s description of the wreck and the bravery of Wal Jessop -was given in a simple, straightforward style. - -Captain Fife watched Edgar narrowly, and came to the conclusion he was -a lad to be trusted, and also a lad who had received a good education. -After the Board meeting he took Edgar into his private office, and -asked him what he intended to do. - -‘I hardly know at present,’ replied Edgar, ‘but I have no doubt I shall -be able to obtain some kind of work until I can look round.’ - -‘Your name seems familiar to me,’ said Captain Fife. - -‘Probably,’ said Edgar, smiling, ‘if you are a lover of cricket.’ - -Captain Fife jumped up from his chair, and said in astonishment: - -‘Surely you are not the son of Robert Foster, who captained the last -English eleven against our team at Lord’s?’ - -‘I am,’ said Edgar, ‘and proud of it.’ - -‘And well you may be, my lad,’ said Captain Fife. ‘The son of such a -sterling, manly cricketer as Robert Foster will not lack friends in -Australia. I suppose it is needless to ask if you play?’ - -‘I am very fond of the game,’ said Edgar, ‘and was captain of my school -when I left.’ - -‘We must give you a trial here,’ said Captain Fife, ‘but in the -meantime I must try and find you something to do.’ He thought for a -few moments, and then said: ‘How would you like to go up country for -a time? I have an interest in a station in the West, and I think you -would enjoy the life. It is very quiet, but the change would in itself -be a novelty to you.’ - -‘I should like it immensely,’ said Edgar; ‘I do not care much for a -town life.’ - -‘I believe you lost everything in the wreck?’ said Captain Fife. - -‘Yes,’ replied Edgar. ‘Wal Jessop has sent a cablegram to my father, -stating I am safe, and also that I lost all, so I have no doubt he will -send me out a draft by an early mail to cover expenses. I do not wish -to draw upon my father continually, and I came out here to earn my -living if possible.’ - -‘Glad to hear it,’ said Captain Fife. ‘We have too many young fellows -out here who live upon money sent them from home. It is a mistaken -kindness, as it causes them to rely upon others instead of themselves, -and self-reliance a man must have to get on in this world.’ - -Edgar was much impressed with what Captain Fife said, and knew it was -sound advice he gave. - -‘My father always taught me to hold my own,’ said Edgar, ‘and to do -what is right. Of course I got into scrapes sometimes at school, but -I never shirked the consequences. I fought a lad called Bully Rakes, -and beat him, the first week I was at Redbank. I was in the right, and -therefore I felt confident of success, although he was a much stronger -lad.’ - -‘So you can box as well as play cricket,’ said Captain Fife, smiling; -‘you’ll get on all right here, I can see. Can you ride well?’ - -‘Fairly well,’ said Edgar. ‘I followed the hounds during the holidays -when I had an opportunity. I should like to have a chance in the -cricket-field here.’ - -‘So you shall,’ said Captain Fife. ‘I will take care your going up -country does not injure your prospects in that line. We have a very -good team on the station, and you will have plenty of practice to keep -your hand in. Some of our best men have been drawn from up country.’ - -It was decided that Edgar, after a week’s stay in Sydney with Wal -Jessop, should go up to Yanda, and try how the life suited him. - -‘I will advance you enough money to keep you going,’ said Captain Fife, -‘and you can repay me when you have “knocked up a cheque,” as we say -here.’ - -Edgar left Captain Fife’s office feeling he had been most fortunate. -His heart was heavy when he thought of the _Distant Shore_ and those on -board who had lost their lives. He could hardly realize, as he walked -the streets of Sydney, how near he had been to death, and that only a -day or two ago. He met Wal Jessop, and told him what Captain Fife had -done. - -‘He’s a good sort,’ said Wal--‘a regular out-and-outer. You’ll have -a real good time at Yanda. It’s different to many stations, for the -hands up there all pull together, and, my eye! don’t they turn out some -good sports. Why, Tom Trundle, one of the best fast bowlers we ever had -in the New South Wales team, came from Yanda. How he learned to bowl -up there, blest if I know! but that he had learned he quickly proved -when he tried his hand on the Association Ground. I’ll never forget -that match,’ went on Wal, warming to his work, as this was one of his -favourite topics. ‘Tommy was picked to play for the country against the -town, and the way he made some of the crack players’ stumps fly was a -caution. Frank Rarey was a good bat--about our best--but the country -chap sent Frank’s middle stump turning summersaults in the air like a -clown in a circus. It was as good as a pipe of ‘bacca after a day’s -hard graft to see the expression on Frank’s face when he saw that stump -fly. He looked at Tom, and he looked at the shattered wicket. Then he -walked into the dressing-room and meditated. When the innings was ended -Frank went up to Tom and said: - -‘“You’re a wonder, Trundle. You’ll have to play for the colony next -time.” - -‘Sure enough he did,’ added Wal; ‘and bless me if he didn’t come off -first pop. He took seven of the Victorian wickets in the very next -match we had against that colony.’ - -‘Something like a triumph,’ said Edgar, who listened to Wal’s recital -with all the ardour of a schoolboy. ‘I only hope I may come off as well -as he did when I have the luck to play for the colony.’ - -‘Did Captain Fife say anything about it?’ asked Wal. ‘He’s a rare one -for cricket, and, in fact, all sorts of sport.’ - -‘He said if I went up country it would not prejudice my chance in the -cricket-field,’ said Edgar. - -‘Nor will it,’ said Wal. ‘It will be far better for you to go up -country than remain hanging about town.’ - -‘I shall have to leave Eva behind until some of Captain Manton’s -friends have been communicated with. My father will probably see to -that when he learns the news. I must write him a long letter by the -next mail, and tell him all about the wreck and how bravely Pilot -Jessop acted.’ - -‘Ay,’ said Wal, with a smile, ‘and if I were you I’d just send him a -few papers in order to let him see how well his son behaved. That would -only be fair. As for the little lass, she’s welcome to stop with us as -long as she’s allowed. It will be a sore trial to my wife to part with -her. You see, we have no bairn of our own,’ added Wal, with a wistful -sigh. - -‘She could not be in better hands,’ said Edgar. ‘I suppose,’ he asked, -as a sudden idea occurred to him, ‘there is no possible chance of -anyone being saved from the wreck? I mean, do you think it possible -anyone could have drifted out to sea on a portion of the wreck and been -picked up by a passing boat?’ - -‘That’s not possible, I think,’ said Wal. ‘No boat left the harbour -next day, and the storm was so bad, I hardly think anyone could have -lived through it out at sea.’ - -‘It was just a thought occurred to me,’ said Edgar. ‘I know every -search has been made, but one clings to hope, even after all hope has -gone.’ - -Wal Jessop took Edgar round Sydney, and showed him several sights. -The more Edgar saw of the city, the more he marvelled at its wondrous -growth. He had been taught much at school about the colonies, but -he had no idea such vast cities as Sydney lay on the other side of -the world. Young though he was, he saw at once how greatly such -possessions as Australia must enhance the power and importance of -the mother-country. He saw how widespread the influence and example -of England was, and every name and building tended to revive some -association with the old country. - -As he sat in the Botanical Gardens with Wal Jessop, looking over the -lovely expanse of harbour before them, and the hills and bays of the -opposite shore, he said: - -‘It is only a lad’s opinion, but I think we are not taught sufficient -about our country’s great possessions abroad when we are at school.’ - -‘Perhaps not,’ said Wal; ‘but on this side of the world our youngsters -are taught more about old England than Australia.’ - -‘That should not be,’ said Edgar. ‘Every child ought to have a -thorough knowledge of his own country, and, from what little I know of -it, the history of Australia must be vastly interesting.’ - -‘It is,’ said Wal, ‘and I have managed to scrape together a good deal -about it. The early settlers here had no easy time, but they did -well, and laid the foundation of a promising colony upon a lot of bad -material. You would hardly think to look at it now that Sydney, a -century ago, was a convict settlement of only a few huts, and inhabited -by desperate criminals, many of whom were more like fiends than human -beings.’ - -‘There are not many traces of those days left?’ said Edgar -questioningly. - -‘No,’ said Wal, ‘and it is far better they should be obliterated. Now, -in Tasmania you see more of it. You would find Port Arthur a curious -old place. It gave me the horrors the first time I saw it.’ - -They chatted on for some time. Wal Jessop was a good talker, and -interested a lad of Edgar’s age. Edgar Foster was a manly boy, not a -boy developed into a man before his time by a forcing process, as too -often is the case in this age of rapid progress. - -On reaching home again, Wal Jessop explained to his wife how Edgar had -been received by Captain Fife. - -‘You’ll not object to keep the little lass here,’ said Wal, ‘while -Edgar goes up country for a few months?’ - -‘I should like to keep her for my own,’ said Mrs. Jessop. ‘She is a -dear child, and will be a joy to our home.’ - -‘She is a lovable little thing,’ said Edgar, ‘and I am sure will give -you no trouble. I do not know whether Captain Manton had any relations -in England, but I imagine he had. In any case, we shall hear something -before very long. I know I shall leave her in safe hands.’ - -‘That you may rest assured of,’ said Mrs. Jessop; ‘and I hope you will -have a good time up country. Captain Fife has evidently taken a fancy -to you, and he’s a man worth knowing.’ - -‘That he is, Mary,’ said her husband; ‘and many’s the good turn he’s -done me.’ - -‘Which you thoroughly deserved,’ said Edgar, with a smile. - - - - -CHAPTER X. A WILD SCENE. - - -Yanda Station was situated in a wild country, and when Edgar Foster -arrived there he thought he had never seen such a dreary spot. -Accustomed to the green fields of old England and her charming rural -landscapes, Edgar found the barren plains and scraggy trees monotonous. -Instead of miles upon miles of green, undulating pasture-land, he saw -brown, hard-baked ground, the stunted grass growing in patches, and -looking parched and dry for want of water. - -Although the first glimpse of Yanda disenchanted Edgar of the ideas he -had formed of ‘up-country’ scenes, the reception he met with from the -station hands reconciled him to the prospect before him. Captain Fife -had written to Benjamin Brody, the manager at Yanda, informing him who -Edgar Foster was, and how he had behaved at the wreck of the _Distant -Shore_. He also stated that Edgar was the son of the famous cricketer, -Robert Foster. This was quite sufficient to ensure Edgar a hearty -reception, and his arrival was quite an event on the station. - -Ben Brody was a born colonial, a man accustomed to take the rough with -the smooth of life and weld them into an even existence. Brody’s temper -was none of the best, but he kept it under control. He was a sober man -in the accepted sense of the word; that is, he never took more liquor -than he could conveniently carry. There was no better rider at Yanda -than Ben Brody, and the toughest buck-jumper generally found he had met -his match when Brody got on to his back. - -Fearless and determined, he was the very man to manage the -somewhat mixed lot of hands on Yanda Station. They had some ‘queer -customers’--Brody’s expression--on Yanda. It was a wild country, and -far out of the beaten track. The wonder to most people who took the -trouble to think about such an outlandish place as Yanda was how it was -kept going, for they would never have been so rash as to argue that -Yanda paid its way. - -But Yanda, thanks to good management, did pay its way, and Captain Fife -and others were perfectly satisfied with their investment. Yanda was -bought cheap at a time when station property in the far West was going -begging, and the installation of Ben Brody as manager had resulted in -its turning out a good bargain. Brody was a great believer in sheep, -but he had not much faith in cattle on Yanda. The hands firmly believed -that Ben Brody had been reared from a very early age upon lean mutton, -and that the taste for any other kind of meat was foreign to him. - -Ben Brody had a horror of fat sheep. He preferred sheep “all wool,” -because wool was worth considerably more than flesh. The slaughtering -of a bullock at Yanda was the signal for much joy on the part of the -hands. When Ben Brody received the news that Edgar Foster would arrive -on a certain day at Yanda, he resolved to duly celebrate the event, -just to give the ‘new chum’ a better idea of the country. - -‘What’s come over Brody?’ asked Will Henton. ‘He’s actually ordered the -slaughtering of a bullock. I am overwhelmed with joy.’ - -Will Henton was a young fellow who discovered town life too fast for -him, so had found his way to Yanda, and turned out a useful man. - -‘There’s a new hand coming,’ said Harry Noke. ‘Brody’s told me about -him. He’s the young fellow who rescued that little lass at the wreck of -the _Distant Shore_, and he’s a son of Robert Foster the cricketer.’ - -‘No!’ said Will Henton. ‘You can’t mean it. What a slice of luck! He’s -sure to play cricket well, and we’re short of a man or two.’ - -‘You know the reason of the slaughter now,’ said Harry. ‘I must confess -beef will be a change from Brody’s everlasting mutton.’ - -‘We must give young Foster a good reception,’ said Will. - -‘He deserves it,’ said Harry, ‘and he’ll be able to spin us some yarns -about the wreck.’ - -‘Plucky young beggar,’ said Will. ‘I’m open to bet you a trifle he can -box.’ - -‘You’re mad on boxing,’ said Harry. ‘It would be a blessing if some -disguised fighting-man came here to knock the conceit out of you.’ - -The hands at Yanda talked the matter of Edgar’s arrival over, and -agreed to make things pleasant for him; occasionally they made matters -rather rough for a new hand, until he paid a substantial footing. - -So it came about that there was much feasting and rejoicing when Edgar -arrived, and he thought them a set of jolly good fellows. - -‘The hospitality makes up for the barrenness of the land,’ thought -Edgar. - -There were a good many blackfellows about Yanda, and they were as keen -on the scent of fresh-killed meat as a hound after a fox. Towards -night, when the feasting was over, and Ben Brody, Edgar, and several -of the hands were sitting on the wide veranda running round the -homestead, dusky forms were seen advancing across the open plain. - -‘Have you black men about here?’ asked Edgar in some surprise. - -‘Thousands of ’em,’ said Brody, without moving a muscle of his face. - -Edgar looked at him, smiling, and said: - -‘They must be pretty tame if there are thousands of them. I suppose -when you first arrived here you brought an army to conquer the country.’ - -‘We’ll say hundreds,’ said Brody; ‘I must have been thinking of sheep.’ - -‘Mutton again!’ whispered Will to Harry Noke. ‘He lives on mutton, -consequently he thinks of sheep.’ - -‘How many hundred blacks have you on Yanda?’ said Edgar, who had been -somewhat prepared for Ben Brody’s exaggerations by Wal Jessop. - -‘Well, really, I couldn’t say for certain,’ replied Brody; ‘I’ve not -had ’em mustered lately. When we’ve a bit of spare time I’ll have ’em -counted for you.’ - -‘Thanks,’ said Edgar; ‘it is always interesting to ascertain what -likelihood there is of the original inhabitants of a country becoming -extinct.’ - -A roar of laughter greeted Edgar’s reply, and Will Henton said: - -‘The young un’s a bit too much for you, Brody. You had better not spin -him any of those well-seasoned aboriginal yarns of yours, for I fancy -they won’t wash.’ - -‘You swallowed some of them, anyway,’ said Ben Brody. - -‘Merely to oblige you,’ said Will. - -Ben Brody glared at him, and then said: - -‘Meat is bad for you, Will; I must in future restrict you to a mutton -diet.’ - -‘What are these fellows coming for?’ asked Edgar, as about thirty -blacks, including a few females, advanced to within a dozen yards or so -of the veranda. - -‘They are on the war-path,’ said Will Henton. ‘The slaughtering of a -bullock at Yanda is an event of such magnitude that even the natives of -the country assemble to give thanks on the occasion.’ - -‘Never mind his chaff,’ said Ben Brody to Edgar; ‘you will have plenty -of it if you remain here very long. Would you care to see these fellows -dance, hold a “corroboree” as they call it?’ - -‘Yes,’ said Edgar, ‘I should very much like to see it.’ - -‘Then you shall. They have not given us anything in that line lately,’ -said Brody. - -He called a big, powerful-looking black, and spoke to him, and made -signs. - -‘I’ve promised them a good square meal if they give us a dance,’ said -Brody. - -Edgar thought it a wild scene as he looked at the dusky forms in the -moonlight. As far as he could see the endless plain stretched out -before him. The white, gaunt trees were ghostly and weird, and the hum -of many insects was in the air. - -In a few minutes Edgar heard a low, crooning sound, which gradually -swelled into a hoarse roar, and then, with a loud shout from their -leader, the black fellows commenced to dance. They stamped upon the -hard ground with bare feet until the sound became like the tramp of -soldiers. Having worked themselves up to a proper pitch of excitement, -the wild fellows threw their limbs about in the most extraordinary -fashion. Some of them leaped high into the air, and the women sat and -clapped their hands and beat them on the ground. - -The black men whirled their arms, and waved heavy sticks over their -heads. Their faces became most repulsive. Most of them had thick, curly -black hair, which hung down in shaggy locks. Their noses were big, -coarse, and wide, and their cheek-bones high, while their mouths were -of great size, and their lips thick. - -As Edgar watched them dancing in this strange fashion in the moonlight -he thought it was the wildest scene he had ever looked upon. - -‘Do they never get tired?’ he asked, as the dance continued, and the -efforts of the blacks did not relax. - -‘They have great powers of endurance,’ said Ben Brody. ‘You see the -big fellow there, to the right? I’ve known him go ninety miles between -sunset and sunrise without so much as a halt. They are treacherous -fellows, some of them, but Yacka is a cut above the others. He’s a -strange fellow. He hails from South Australia, and the blacks around -here seem afraid of him. Strange to say, he speaks English well, and is -far better looking than the others. My own impression is that there’s a -bit of white blood in his veins, although his skin is black. Eh, Yacka, -come here!’ he shouted. - -The black, who was standing alone looking at the dancers, who were now -slowing down, stepped quickly on to the veranda without an effort. - -‘This is Yacka,’ said Brody to Edgar, and then turning to the black, he -said: ‘A new hand, only arrived to-day. You’ll be able to show him a -thing or two about Yanda, I reckon.’ - -Yacka nodded and, holding out his hand towards Edgar, said: - -‘He says true. I know much about this country. Much about other country -far off. Ah, you shake my hand! Good fellow! Yacka your friend.’ - -Edgar had taken the black’s proffered hand, giving it a hearty shake; -this he did without a moment’s hesitation. - -‘You’ve made friends with Yacka,’ said Brody; ‘that is the way he tests -a man. I’ve known fellows come here and refuse to shake hands with -Yacka. Not a blessed black in the whole tribe would help the man who -declined Yacka’s hand. I dare say it’s quite as clean as a good many -white men’s hands.’ - -‘I like the look of him,’ said Edgar, ‘and how well he talks! Have you -ever tried to make him work as a hand on the station?’ - -‘Bless you, he wouldn’t demean himself to work like these fellows, and -if he did they’d buck against it,’ said Brody. - -‘Quite right, too,’ said Harry Noke; ‘we don’t want a lot of infernal -blacks doing station work; they are good for nothing but thieving and -every sort of iniquity.’ - -‘Perhaps white men have driven them to it,’ said Edgar; ‘I dare say -they managed very well before Australia was discovered by Captain Cook.’ - -‘You cannot make these black fellows understand what civilization -means,’ said Brody. - -‘Rum,’ grunted a quiet-looking man, who had scarcely spoken during the -evening. - -‘When Jim Lee offers a remark, which you may have observed is seldom,’ -said Brody, ‘it is generally to the point. Undoubtedly rum and -civilization go hand in hand where the blacks are concerned. Apart from -rum, however, the beggars are too infernally stupid to learn anything.’ - -‘Yacka seems fairly intelligent,’ said Edgar. - -‘I make an exception of Yacka,’ said Ben. ‘He’s sharp enough, and the -way he carves emu eggs and boomerangs is a caution. The ideas that chap -can put on an emu egg beat creation. But he’s a thorough wild man, -although he does talk English well, and has ideas above his fellows. -You could no more get Yacka to conform to our idea of civilized -behaviour than you could train a monkey to keep out of mischief. Yacka -is full of mischief, but it’s a humorous sort of mischief, and does not -do much harm.’ - -‘Yacka’s the only useful black we have around here,’ said Will Henton. -‘He’s a splendid fag in the cricket field, and when he’s extra good we -let him handle a bat. He shapes well, too, and I’m inclined to think -Yacka might be developed into a decent cricketer. He rides well, and -that’s more than the other fellows do; and when he’s handled my gun -I’ve seen him make some fair shots. The rummy part of the business is -that Yacka won’t be civilized, as Ben says, and you can’t get him to -leave the camp.’ - -Edgar Foster thought a good deal about Yacka that night, and resolved -to try and make friends with him, and learn something of his past life, -which he felt sure would be interesting. - - - - -CHAPTER XI. YACKA THE BLACK. - - -Edgar Foster, after six months’ experience on Yanda Station, liked the -life very much. He was popular with the hands, and Ben Brody had taken -to him in a manner that caused men to marvel. It was seldom Brody made -a chum of anyone, but he had done so of Edgar, who was young enough to -be his son. - -It was an intense relief to Edgar when he received letters from his -father and sister. They were letters such as might have been expected -from them, and the way in which they referred to the terrible loss -of the _Distant Shore_ brought tears into Edgar’s eyes. His father -enclosed him a draft, and said he was proud of his son, and knew he had -risked his life to save Captain Manton’s child. Inquiries had been made -in every direction, but no relations had been found to claim little -Eva. Captain Manton had not saved much money, and what he had was in -the hands of the shipping company to which the _Distant Shore_ belonged. - -Robert Foster wrote that he had consulted the chairman of the company, -and it had been arranged that if no relation claimed Eva she was to -remain in charge of Wal Jessop and his wife, and a sum of money would -be paid annually to them. In concluding his letter Robert Foster gave -his son good advice, telling him to go on as he had commenced, and to -brave dangers if by doing so he could help others. - -Doris Foster wrote Edgar a loving letter, in which she gave him the -news that Will Brown had sailed for Australia, and also that she had -heard Raymond Rakes had turned out badly, and been sent to sea: - -‘Will has promised to try and make a small fortune in Australia,’ she -wrote, ‘and when he has done so he is to return to England and ask me -a certain question which I leave you to guess. Please do not tell him, -if you see him, that under any circumstances the answer will be “Yes.” -It might make him lazy if he knew the capture was certain. You are a -dear, noble, brave brother, and we are very proud of you. I am posting -you a _Graphic_. You will see therein a portrait of a certain young -fellow who is styled “The _Distant Shore_ Hero,” which is no more than -he deserves. Give little Eva a lot of kisses from me. I long to see the -child you saved so splendidly. I am sure Wal Jessop must be a grand -man, and his wife a dear, good woman. Please do not marry a black lady, -and come home as civilized as when you left.’ - -Edgar read these letters again and again until Ben Brody said: - -‘You are a lucky beggar to have such interesting letters. Those I get -are never worth reading twice. They’re mostly about sheep, and the -price of wool, and you cannot knock much romance out of those articles.’ - -Before he had been at Yanda a month, Edgar had shown them how he could -bat, and also use his fists; and, much to Will Henton’s surprise, he -had found his match with the gloves on. - -‘You’re a hard hitter,’ he said to Edgar; ‘no wonder you made Bully -Rakes sing small.’ - -Edgar related many tales about his schooldays, and worked the hands up -to a pitch of enthusiasm over the celebrated match with Fairfield. - -‘Blest if I don’t feel as though I’d seen it!’ said Ben Brody. - -‘Good yarn!’ exclaimed Jim Lee, the silent one. - -‘What a brute that Rakes must be,’ said Will Henton. ‘Fancy a fellow -going against his own side. You say he’s gone to sea? I hope he won’t -come over here; we want none of his sort.’ - -‘I’d like to meet Will Brown,’ said Ben Brody. ‘Suppose you ask him to -come up here and try his luck? He’ll not make a fortune very quick, but -it will keep him out of mischief.’ - -‘I’ll write to his ship in Sydney when she arrives, and ask him,’ said -Edgar; ‘I think it would just suit him.’ - -‘We can always find room for an extra hand or two on Yanda,’ said -Brody, with a wink, ‘provided they’re the right sort.’ - -‘You’ll find Will all right,’ said Edgar. - -‘If he comes up to your standard he’ll do,’ replied Brody. - -There was not much variety in the life at Yanda, but it was new to -Edgar, and he found much to interest him. He had the usual experience -with a buck-jumper, and felt the peculiar sensation of being hurled -into the air, with no certainty as to where he would come down. This is -how Edgar described his first throw from a buck-jumper to his father: - -‘You suddenly feel his back arch, and it nearly cuts you in two. -Then you discover he has all four legs off the ground at the same -time. Finally you are shot into space, much in the same way as you -would go if a gigantic catapult propelled you. The sensation is not -pleasant, and the knowledge that all your mates are enjoying the -undignified manner in which you are unseated adds to the general -discomfiture. However, I am a fair rough-rider now, although there’s -one horse--“Brody’s buck-jumper,” he’s called--I cannot tackle, and no -other man on the place with the exception of Brody himself. There’s a -history attached to this animal which you may hear some day. Brody once -got him into a horse-box, I believe, and the passengers on the train -sent a deputation to the guard at the first stopping-place to have -the horse removed. Someone suggested the animal ought to be shot, but -Brody’s wrath was so great when he heard this that no further mention -was made of it. Anyhow, Brody’s buck-jumper had his own way, as he -always has, for the remainder of the journey.’ - -Yacka the black had taken to Edgar Foster from the moment he took his -hand, and during the six months that had passed he was constantly about -the homestead asking what he could do for him. - -‘Bless me if I don’t think you’ll civilize Yacka in time!’ said Brody. -‘I never knew him come round here so much before. It’s all that -handshake did it.’ - -‘He’s a good fellow, although he is black,’ said Edgar. ‘I’m very fond -of Yacka, but I cannot quite make him out. He seems to have something -on his mind. I hope he has done nothing very dreadful.’ - -‘You never know what these black fellows are up to,’ said Brody; ‘but I -do not think Yacka is deceitful. Revengeful they all are, and if anyone -harmed Yacka or others belonging to him, I believe he would make it -particularly warm for him.’ - -Yacka followed Edgar about with dog-like devotion, and never tired of -doing odd jobs for him. Edgar watched the black carve wonderful scenes -on emu eggs, and it was extraordinary the faithfulness with which he -depicted birds and beasts on these brittle shells. - -After taking particular care to carve one egg, Yacka, with a look of -fear in his eyes, handed it to Edgar. - -‘Why, it’s a cave surrounded by rocks and shrubs,’ said Edgar. ‘Where -did you see it? There is nothing at all like that about here.’ - -‘No,’ said Yacka, ‘long way off. Tramp, tramp, for miles. Lonely desert -where no white man ever been--wonderful place. Like to see it?’ - -The black spoke eagerly, and Edgar saw there was something he had left -hidden, which he did not care for him to know. - -‘It would be no good going such a long journey, Yacka,’ he replied, -‘because there are no people, and what is to be found when we get -there? We might starve on the way, or die from want of water.’ - -‘Plenty water,’ said Yacka. ‘I know the track; no one else knows it. -There!’ he exclaimed, as he smashed the emu egg he had been at so much -trouble to carve, ‘no one find it now, not even you.’ - -‘I should remember the place if I saw it,’ said Edgar. ‘You carve so -well, and I am sure what you carved on that egg is true to Nature.’ - -‘Come with Yacka, and I will show you much,’ said the black. ‘Make you -rich--richer than Master Fife, richer than your Queen; but you must go -alone with Yacka.’ - -The black spoke earnestly, and his eyes glistened. - -‘I don’t see much chance of making a fortune or finding riches in a -desert,’ said Edgar. ‘Where is this wonderful cave that contains so -much wealth?’ - -‘Many miles,’ said Yacka; ‘over Great Desert in Northern Territory. It -is not all sand. No white man has been there; but Yacka has, and knows -there is grass and water, and food, plenty food.’ - -‘Are you certain no white man has ever been there?’ asked Edgar. - -Yacka hesitated a few moments, and then said: - -‘No white _man_.’ - -‘And no white woman?’ laughed Edgar, who noticed the stress Yacka laid -on man. - -Yacka sprang to his feet, and waved his arms about wildly. - -‘Come and see!’ he cried. ‘Come to the White Spirit’s Cave! I am the -son of Enooma!’ - -The last word he said in a soft, liquid tone, far different from his -usual rather harsh mode of speech; and he lingered over the name with -evident fondness. - -Edgar became interested, and the spirit of adventure began to stir -within him. - -‘Who is Enooma?’ he asked, endeavouring to speak the word as Yacka -pronounced it. - -‘The White Spirit of the Great Desert,’ said Yacka, in a solemn voice. -‘She rests in the cave in the land I came from. She is beautiful and -white as clouds; and I am black as the thunder-makers--and her son.’ - -‘How can that be?’ asked Edgar. ‘Yacka must be mistaken; he cannot be -the son of Enooma the White Spirit. How can I trust him if he deceives -me?’ - -The black looked round, and, seeing no one about, said: - -‘Yacka speaks true, else how would he know the cave where no white man -has been?’ - -‘Suppose I promise to go with you to the cave,’ said Edgar, ‘how would -it be possible for us to go alone?’ - -‘We have guns,’ said Yacka, relapsing into ordinary speech, ‘and there -is much to shoot where I go. We follow tracks through big white man’s -country, and cross rivers. I came from there, and can return. Yacka -knows a track once he has followed it.’ - -‘Give me time to think it over,’ said Edgar. ‘I trust you, Yacka, but -I have others to think about. I have a good sister, and a kind father, -in far-away England, and there will be dangers to encounter on our -journey.’ - -‘Yes,’ assented Yacka, ‘dangers, but we shall not die. The White -Spirit will watch over us when she knows we are coming towards her. -Enooma rests and waits for us. Speak no words to them,’ he added, and -pointed towards the homestead. - -‘All you have told me I promise to hold sacred,’ said Edgar. - -‘It is good,’ said Yacka, and calmly commenced to carve a snake on one -of the boomerangs, which he picked up from the ground where he had -thrown them. - -Edgar Foster felt he was about to embark upon strange adventures. He -knew Yacka was no ordinary black, and Ben Brody had said he believed -Yacka had white blood in his veins. Who could this White Spirit Enooma -be, whom Yacka called his mother? Could it be possible a white woman -had penetrated to the unknown parts of the Northern Territory? If so, -how had she reached there? and how could it be that Yacka the black was -her son? Probably it was some superstition Yacka had inherited from his -tribe. - -Edgar pondered over the story of riches Yacka had related. Gold was dug -out of the earth in most unlikely places. Barren wastes had been found -to teem with the precious metal. The possibilities of the country Edgar -felt were not yet known, and in a new and unexplored part of the vast -land he was now in what might not happen? He knew he could trust Yacka, -but he would have preferred to take a mate with him. Will Brown would -be just the one, and if he could persuade Yacka to take Will along -with them it would be glorious. He thought over the excuses he could -make to Captain Fife and Ben Brody for leaving Yanda. If he stated he -was prompted by a love of adventure they would believe him, and it -would be the truth. There would be no difficulty in getting away, and -no time for returning need be named. - -Eagerly Edgar awaited the arrival of Will Brown in order to give Yacka -a chance of making friends with him. - - - - -CHAPTER XII. IN SEARCH OF ADVENTURES. - - -In due course Will Brown arrived at Yanda, and he was only too glad -to have the opportunity of meeting his chum, Edgar Foster, in the new -country to which he had come. As for Edgar, it was with unbounded -delight he welcomed Will Brown. They had much to talk about, and it was -a source of much joy to Edgar that he could listen to one who had so -recently seen those dear to him in the home he loved so well, on the -banks of the Thames. - -When Edgar made known to Ben Brody his intention of leaving Yanda for a -time in search of adventures, the manager evinced no surprise. - -‘I didn’t expect you would be here long,’ he said. ‘Young ‘uns like to -roam, and I don’t blame you. I’ve had enough wandering about to last -me a lifetime, and I’m settled for good here, so long as they will have -me. I shall be sorry to lose you, and I wish you had chosen to remain. -You have picked a good guide in Yacka. What that black chap knows is -beyond credit. He’s never said where he came from, but if I’m a judge -it is somewhere in the region of the MacDonnell Ranges. There are some -powerful savage tribes over there, and I’d advise you to steer clear of -them, that is, if you get so far; but you are a precious long way from -there, you bet.’ - -‘I do not know where we are going,’ said Edgar; ‘but Yacka has made -great promises, and if he fulfils them there will be something to talk -about when we return.’ - -Yacka, with some show of reluctance, agreed to Will Brown accompanying -them. He yielded when Edgar said he would not go without Will, for the -black was determined Edgar should undertake the journey. - -The night before their departure they had a great ‘send off,’ all hands -coming into the homestead for the occasion. - -The general opinion seemed to be that Edgar and Will were about to -follow Yacka purely for the sake of adventure, and the good fellows -thought all the better of them for their pluck and spirit. - -Ben Brody had given each of them a good horse, and they had the pick of -the best guns on the station. Will Henton gave them a revolver each, -expressing the hope that they would clear the country of a few blacks. - -‘I hope we shall not have to use them for any such purpose,’ said -Edgar; ‘but if it comes to a fight we shall be all there.’ - -‘You are going on a fool’s errand,’ said Harry Noke; ‘much better -remain where you are. I would not trust Yacka, or any other -blackfellow. It’s like enough he’ll lead you into danger out of pure -devilment.’ - -‘You are wrong,’ said Jim Lee; ‘Yacka’s square.’ - -‘Jim’s right,’ said Brody. ‘You’re riled, Harry, because you have not -pluck enough to go with them. As it is the last night, we must have -Yacka in and give him a drink.’ - -Ben Brody went into the veranda and gave a peculiar whistle, which -sounded shrilly on the still night air. In a few minutes Yacka appeared. - -‘That’s fetched him,’ said Will Henton; ‘Brody’s a wonder at all sorts -of signals. I believe he’s a different call for every man on the place.’ - -‘Have a drink, Yacka,’ said Ben Brody. ‘What’s it to be, rum or beer?’ - -Yacka smacked his lips, and said, ‘Beer.’ - -‘That’s better,’ said Jim Lee; ‘rum’s a curse.’ - -Yacka drank the beer with evident relish. - -‘Like a square meal?’ said Brody. - -The black nodded, and Brody helped him plentifully to the remains of -the feast. - -‘Where are you going to take these youngsters?’ said Ben Brody. - -‘Long way,’ replied Yacka. ‘Bring them safe back.’ - -‘I hope so,’ said Brody. ‘Going in search of the lost tribes?’ - -Yacka grinned, showing his gleaming teeth. - -‘All tribes lost since the white men came,’ he replied. - -‘Guess you’re about right there,’ said Brody. ‘Black and white cannot -live side by side; one of them’s bound to go, and it’s the black. Now, -if they were all like you, Yacka, we could get on well together. Bless -me if I don’t believe you are half a white man!’ - -A peculiar look came into Yacka’s eyes. - -‘Think so?’ he said. ‘Black skin, white man’s heart.’ - -‘Bravo!’ shouted Brody. ‘You shall have another glass for that. Fill -up, lads! Here’s to our mates, and a safe journey along with Yacka!’ - -All hands were becoming hilarious, and began to sing ‘For they are -jolly good fellows.’ - -When the noise subsided, Brody said: - -Do you want a horse, Yacka?’ - -The black shook his head, and slapped his legs. - -‘Yes, I know,’ said Brody; ‘your legs will carry you quite as far as -any of our station nags. You’ll accept a gun, eh?’ - -The black sprang to his feet, and said: - -‘A gun for my own! Very good, Master Brody; I like a gun.’ - -‘Then you shall have one,’ said Ben. ‘I know you can shoot.’ - -Yacka went through a performance of shooting an imaginary object in -such a realistic manner that everybody laughed. - -It was a merry night, and all slept soundly. In the morning Edgar and -Will made a start from Yanda with Yacka, who was on foot, and the black -looked the picture of a trained athlete. - -Yacka had discarded his ordinary loin-cloth, and wore instead a -peculiar arrangement in which he could stow away a variety of articles. -He declined to wear any other clothing, and his body shone in the -sunlight, and the muscles stood out on his arms, chest, and lower -limbs. His curly hair was sufficient protection to his head from the -burning sun, and it was in much better condition than the shaggy -locks of the blacks who were looking on. Yacka had evidently told the -blacks he was leaving Yanda, and they looked as disconsolate as their -expressionless faces would permit. - -As for Edgar and Will Brown, they were in high spirits, and, mounted on -two very fair horses, thoroughly equipped for a journey, they looked a -fine pair of young fellows. - -‘You’ll strike a station about sundown, I reckon,’ said Ben Brody. -‘They’ll be glad to see you if you say where you hail from, although -it makes very little difference about that round here. Take care of -yourselves, my lads, and I hope Yacka will bring you back to Yanda -soon.’ - -After hearty handshakes all round, the trio set off amidst cheers and -the loud, peculiar cries of the blacks. Ben Brody watched them for a -long time, and waved his hat in response to the salutes of Edgar and -Will. - -‘Lads of mettle, both of ’em,’ said Brody. ‘Such a wild-goose chase -as they are on would just have suited me in my young days. Good luck -go with you, my lads! You’ll always have a warm corner in Ben Brody’s -heart.’ - -As the homestead they had left behind became fainter and fainter in -the distance, Edgar and Will turned round in their saddles and waved a -parting salute to Ben Brody, whose figure was just discernible on the -veranda. - -As the morning wore on, the heat became intense, and in the afternoon -it was so hot they decided to camp under the shade of some trees. -Towards evening they went on again, and that night slept in the open, -with their saddles for pillows and the bare ground for a bed. Had it -not been for the constant singing and stinging of the mosquitoes, they -would have had a pleasant night, as the air was soft and warm, and they -needed no covering. - -Yacka stretched himself out near them, and slept like a dog--half awake -and ready to spring to his feet at the slightest sound. At daybreak -they made a slight meal, and then proceeded on their journey. Yacka -went ahead, and at such a pace that the horses often had to break into -a canter to keep up with him. They arrived at Bardo Station that night, -and met with a hospitable reception. - -Charles Brunt, the manager, was rather amused at the idea of a couple -of lads going in search of adventure, with a blackfellow as guide and -companion. He knew Yacka, and was of the same opinion as Ben Brody, -that the black had white blood in his veins. - -‘This is a hospitable land, anyhow,’ said Edgar, when they had been -away from Yanda for about a fortnight, and had managed, through Yacka’s -guidance, to fall in with comfortable quarters almost every night. - -As they went on, however, Edgar saw they were gradually getting into -a wilder country, and farther away from the beaten track. Yacka said, -when questioned, he was taking a short cut, and that he knew the way. - -‘Where are you steering for?’ asked Edgar. - -‘South Australian border,’ said Yacka. ‘Then we work up to the -MacDonnell Ranges, past Alice Springs. You’ll see wild country then, -when we get through the ranges.’ - -‘How long will it take us to reach the ranges?’ asked Will. - -‘Long time yet,’ said Yacka. ‘Many miles’ tramp a day. Horses will -knock up, but not Yacka, then you have to walk it.’ - -‘A pleasant prospect,’ said Edgar. ‘We may have to tramp hundreds of -miles. However, we are in for it, and we may as well see all Yacka has -to show us. I shall be sorely cut up if he has deceived us.’ - -‘Do you think he would do so?’ asked Will. - -‘Not intentionally,’ replied Edgar; ‘but what may appear wonderful to -him may be commonplace to us.’ - -Having got out of the beaten track, they had to rely upon their guns -for food. They had an ample supply of ammunition, preferring to load up -their horses in this way to carrying provisions. Edgar was a good shot, -and seldom missed his mark. - -‘We must be careful and not miss,’ he said, ‘for every shot is of -importance.’ - -One afternoon they had an exciting chase after kangaroos, and Edgar and -Will thought it excellent sport. Yacka followed the hunt, and when he -suddenly vanished, Edgar in a few minutes saw him ahead, waiting for -the kangaroos to pass. - -‘By Jove! how Yacka can run!’ said Edgar. ‘Look where he is now. He’ll -get a kangaroo sure enough, without firing a shot.’ - -They reined in their horses, and watched him. When the kangaroos -found the chase was not so hot, they slackened their speed, and leapt -along at a steadier pace. Yacka was concealed behind a huge tree, -and as a large kangaroo went past he slipped quickly round and dealt -it a terrific blow with a heavy knobstick he carried in his hand. -The kangaroo fell down stunned, and with a whoop Edgar and Will rode -forward, in case any of the herd should make an attack on Yacka. When -they pulled up, they found Yacka had cut the animal’s throat, and was -contemplating it with satisfaction. - -Will, having dismounted, picked up the stick Yacka had struck the -kangaroo with. It was smooth, hard wood, with a notched handle, and -gradually swelling larger until, at the end, there was a sharp, smooth -knob, which was so heavy it might have been weighted with iron. - -‘A formidable weapon,’ he said, holding it out to Edgar. - -‘That is a nulla-nulla,’ said Yacka. ‘Crack a man’s skull easily.’ - -‘What is it weighted with?’ asked Edgar. - -‘Nothing,’ said Yacka. ‘Very hard, heavy wood, all smoothed down with -sharp stone and rubbed with coarse sand. Never break it. Hard as iron.’ - -‘Are they used in your tribal wars?’ asked Will. - -Yacka nodded and said: - -‘Terrible blows from them. Split a man’s head right open. See!’ He took -the weapon from Edgar, and with one blow shattered the dead kangaroo’s -skull. It split in two, and Yacka scooped out the brains. He then cut -off the tail, and said, ‘Have good soup to-night. This fellow make -better soup than ox-tail.’ - -They shook their heads sceptically; the tail did not look very inviting -then. - -Yacka selected a spot to camp in near a small spring of water. He -then proceeded to make a fire, collecting sundry dry pieces of wood -and a kind of moss for the purpose. He filled the large ‘billy’ can -he carried during the day slung across his back with sundry other -articles, and, having skinned the kangaroo’s tail, cut it up into small -pieces, and put it in the can. - -How he managed to make it so tasty Edgar could not imagine, but it was -delicious, and they voted Yacka was right when he said it was better -than ox-tail. - -‘Yacka’s a capital cook,’ said Will, ‘and the beauty of him is that he -wants so little to cook with.’ - -‘He’d rather surprise some of the modern cooks,’ said Edgar. ‘They -appear to contrive to do away with the genuine flavour of everything -they cook, and Yacka makes a point of retaining that flavour.’ - -How they did enjoy this wild life! and, so far, their powers of -endurance had not been severely tested. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII. BY THE LAGOON. - - -They had been more than a month away from Yanda, and Edgar began to -wonder where their march would lead them. Yacka did not vouchsafe much -information, but kept steadily on his way at a pace that astonished -them. Mile after mile was traversed, and their guide showed no sign of -weariness or flagging. - -One beautiful moonlight night they camped by the shore of a large -lagoon, which reminded them of a small lake in their own country. It -was a magnificent sight, this sheet of still water glistening in the -moonlight, the trees which overhung it reflecting weird shadows on the -surface. - -‘I had no idea there were such lakes as these,’ said Edgar. ‘There must -be a lot of good shooting about here.’ - -‘Plenty of ducks and herons,’ said Yacka. ‘I will get you some ducks -without firing a shot.’ - -They were interested in watching Yacka catch wild ducks. The black -crept cautiously into the water, and then sat down amongst a lot of -cover, which hid his head from view. Presently they heard a call such -as the wild duck makes. - -‘That’s Yacka,’ said Edgar. ‘He can imitate the cries of all kinds of -birds and animals. Look! there’s a flock of wild ducks coming over.’ - -The birds flew right into the lagoon, and settled down on the water -not far from Yacka. In a few minutes there was a flutter in the water, -and the flock rose quickly and flew rapidly away, leaving three of -their number struggling entangled in a fine-meshed net Yacka had thrown -dexterously over them. Yacka stood up, and, seizing the ducks one by -one, quickly killed them, and brought them to the shore where Edgar and -Will were sitting. - -‘Cleverly done,’ said Edgar. ‘If we run short of ammunition there is -little fear of starving when Yacka can effect such captures.’ - -The ducks were spitted and roasted, Yacka as usual acting as cook, and -they were thoroughly enjoyed. Wild bees seemed plentiful, and Yacka -went in search of honey, which he soon found in the hollow of a tree. - -So pleasant was it by the lagoon that they rested there for several -days, enjoying bathing in the lukewarm water, and finding plenty of -birds to supply their daily wants. Yacka captured a native bear, a -curious little fellow with a woolly skin, and a sharp, inquiring face. -When tucked up he looked for all the world like a big ball. Huge -lizards were occasionally seen gliding about, and the shrill cries of -parrots were heard overhead. At night the peculiar cry of the laughing -jackass was heard. A flock of black swan passed by, but did not settle -on the lagoon. They also saw pigeons, wild geese, plover, and quail, -and a couple of pelicans. - -So interesting was the wild life of this lagoon that Edgar was loath -to move on into less hospitable country, but he saw signs that Yacka -was becoming impatient, so decided to resume their march. They left the -camp by the lagoon with much regret, and cast many a wistful glance -behind. - -‘It will be a long time before we strike such a good camping-ground -again,’ said Edgar. - -‘Wait until you reach Yacka’s country,’ said the black; ‘find plenty -sport there. My tribe help you hunt and fish in big lakes and rivers.’ - -‘To which tribe do you belong?’ asked Edgar. - -‘MacDonnell Ranges,’ said Yacka; ‘but we have gone miles and miles -further north to the land of Enooma, the White Spirit, across sandy -desert. My tribe very old and warlike. Their country goes far into the -Northern Territory.’ - -‘So your tribe is known as the MacDonnell Ranges blacks,’ said Edgar; -‘but you have a native name, I expect. What is it?’ - -‘The Enooma,’ said Yacka. ‘We are the favoured tribe of the great White -Spirit.’ - -‘And you are the son of Enooma,’ said Edgar. ‘Then we are safe with -you.’ - -‘No one will harm the friends of the son of Enooma,’ said Yacka. - -‘Why did you leave your own country?’ asked Edgar. - -‘To wander far and learn much. It was the wish of Enooma, and she must -be obeyed. I have been in big cities--Sydney, Melbourne, Adelaide, and -Brisbane, and have learned many things and seen much evil,’ said Yacka. - -‘And how did you get on to Yanda Station?’ said Edgar. - -‘From Queensland. I went to Adelaide first, and then walked to the -other big cities. From Brisbane I went on until I came to Yanda, and -there I camped.’ - -Yacka went on ahead, and Edgar said to Will: - -‘It will be worth all our travels if we can clear up this mystery -about Yacka’s birth. He must have been taught by white people, or he -would not speak as he does. It is getting more and more interesting. -Who would have thought when we were at Redbank we should in so short a -time be tramping over the wilds of Australia with only a black for our -companion?’ - -‘I wonder what they are up to at Redbank now?’ said Will. - -‘The usual routine work,’ replied Edgar. ‘We had some jolly times -there.’ - -‘I wish I could make a fortune!’ said Will suddenly. - -Edgar laughed as he replied: - -‘It does not look much like it at present, but there is no telling what -may happen. Yacka says he can make me rich, and if so you will have a -share in the plunder. Why do you wish to make a fortune? You were not -always such a mercenary fellow.’ - -‘Because I love your sister, and I want to be in a position some day to -ask her to be my wife. Now do you understand?’ - -‘Yes,’ said Edgar, ‘and I wish you luck. Doris is a lovable girl, and I -know you will try and make her happy. It is a long time to look ahead, -but there is nothing like having an object in life to make a man -successful.’ - -‘You know my object,’ said Will. ‘What is yours?’ - -‘To earn a good name, and to make my father proud of his son,’ said -Edgar. - -‘Then you will certainly succeed,’ said Will, ‘even if you have not -done so already.’ - -Edgar laughed as he said: - -‘I have not done much at present to earn a name for myself. If ever I -become a rich man, I will try and do good with my money. I have always -found there is a lot of pleasure in helping other people.’ - -‘You always manage to get on with people,’ said Will. ‘You have even -made a staunch friend of Yacka. How did you manage it?’ - -‘By treating him more like a human being than a dog,’ said Edgar. ‘Of -course, Yacka is not like most of the natives. They are a dull, stupid -lot, what I have seen of them so far, and it would be almost impossible -to teach them anything. I believe Yacka could be taught just the same -as a white man.’ - -One night, as they were camping under the shade of some bushes, Edgar -was awakened by something cool touching his face. He put out his hand -and felt a cold, smooth substance, which he at once knew must be a -snake. He sprang to his feet, clutching the snake and flinging it from -him. The noise roused Will, and Yacka was quickly on the alert. It was -too dark to see anything, but Yacka shifted their camping-ground. In -the morning Yacka came across a venomous yellow snake, which he killed -and brought to Edgar. - -‘Yellow snake,’ he said; ‘dangerous! Deadly poison! Almost as bad as a -death adder! Yacka skin him,’ which he at once proceeded to do. - -Edgar congratulated himself upon a lucky escape, for had the snake -bitten him there would have been but little chance of his continuing -the journey. For breakfast Yacka was busily engaged in roasting strips -of flesh, but neither Edgar nor Will could think what animal he had -killed to provide their meal. - -‘What have you got there?’ asked Will. ‘I hope you’re not toasting that -snake.’ - -Yacka shook his head and said: - -‘You try it first, then I will tell you what it is. Very good indeed!’ -and he smacked his lips. - -They enjoyed the tasty morsels, and Yacka informed them it was the -flesh of a species of iguana, one of the lizard tribe. - -Will shuddered as he said: - -‘I confess it tasted all right, but I do not think I should have eaten -it had I known what it was.’ - -They were about to resume their journey, when they heard someone -‘cooeying’ loudly, and the sound proclaimed the person was some -distance away. - -Yacka had carefully avoided meeting wanderers in the country they had -come through, and when he heard the ‘cooey’ he held up his hand, and -they stopped. - -‘Let us see who it is,’ said Edgar. ‘It will be a change to meet a -stranger.’ - -‘All right,’ said Yacka; ‘I know where that comes from. We are near the -telegraph route. Send news from Adelaide right across the country to -Port Darwin. It is men, perhaps, looking after the line.’ - -‘Bravo!’ said Will. ‘We shall at least be able to hear some fresh news.’ - -They proceeded in the direction of the sound, and in the course of a -quarter of an hour came upon a camp, where four white men were sitting -down smoking and chatting. - -‘Hallo! what have we got here?’ said one of the men, as he saw Yacka -advancing in front of Edgar and Will. - -‘Glad to see you,’ said Edgar, stepping forward. ‘We have not had any -company but our own for such a long time that we are thankful to have -fallen in with you.’ - -‘You’re welcome,’ said the man. ‘Where do you hail from?’ - -‘We have come from Yanda station, in the west of New South Wales.’ - -The man stared at them in amazement. - -‘What, just as you are? You two youngsters, with this blackfellow!’ - -‘Yes,’ said Will. ‘My friend was going alone with Yacka, but as I -wanted to be in it if there were any adventures, they decided to take -me along with them.’ - -‘Well, upon my word,’ said the man, ‘you’re a couple of good plucked -’uns! Do you know where you are?’ - -‘I have not the faintest idea,’ said Edgar, ‘but Yacka has.’ - -‘You seem to have a good deal of confidence in this blackfellow,’ said -the man, eyeing Yacka closely. - -‘We have,’ said Edgar. ‘He’s a fine fellow.’ - -‘That’s more than I can say for some of his kind,’ said the man. ‘It -was only the other week one of our fellows was murdered beyond the -Ranges by some of these blacks.’ - -‘Revenge!’ said Yacka quietly. ‘How many of the black men had he -killed?’ - -‘Blest if the fellow can’t speak English as well as I can!’ said the -man in astonishment. ‘Maybe it was revenge, but we don’t allow black -men to kill white men without making an example of them.’ Turning to -Edgar he said: ‘I like the look of you, young fellow, and your mate. My -name’s Walter Hepburn, and I’m in the Government service, and stationed -at Alice Springs, where the telegraph office is. We’ve been repairing -on the line, and are on our way back to the Springs. If you care to -come on with us, I have no doubt we can show you some fun.’ - -‘How far are we from Alice Springs?’ asked Edgar. - -‘A couple of days will take us there.’ - -‘Then we shall be very pleased to go with you, and thank you heartily -for your invitation. My name is Edgar Foster.’ - -‘What! the young fellow who saved the skipper’s baby from the wreck of -the _Distant Shore_?’ exclaimed Walter Hepburn. - -‘Yes,’ said Edgar sadly; ‘we were the only two saved.’ - -‘Give me your hand, lad,’ said Walter Hepburn; ‘I’m proud to shake it. -Here, lads, give three cheers for Edgar Foster!’ - -The men gave three ringing cheers, that echoed far and wide. - -It made Edgar’s heart beat fast to hear them in this wild country. - -Good deeds make themselves known and felt the wide world over, and -their influence can make men better even in a wilderness. - -Yacka was pleased at the reception given to Edgar, and his black face -was all smiling. - -‘That blackfellow’s uncommon fond of you, I reckon?’ said Walter -Hepburn. - -‘He is,’ said Edgar. ‘Yacka planned this expedition for us, and we are -in search of adventures, and want to see the country.’ - -That night Edgar and Will enjoyed a hearty supper with their newly-made -acquaintances; and Edgar had to relate how he was rescued, and how he -saved Eva from the wreck of the _Distant Shore_. - -When Edgar mentioned to Walter Hepburn that they were going far beyond -the Ranges with Yacka, he looked serious. - -‘If you’ll take my advice, you will make for Adelaide from Alice -Springs. It is over a thousand miles from there to Adelaide. If you -go on north, to Port Darwin, that is over nine hundred miles. Where -does Yacka, as you call him, want to take you on the other side of the -Ranges?’ - -‘That is his secret,’ said Edgar, ‘and I cannot tell you what he has -told me. Before we started from Yanda I meant to go through with this -business, and I’ll do it if I live.’ - -‘I admire your pluck,’ said Walter Hepburn; ‘but what is the use of -risking your life when there is no object to be gained?’ - - - - -CHAPTER XIV. ON THE OVERLAND LINE. - - -A couple of days after their meeting with the telegraph repairers -the party arrived at Alice Springs--the most interesting of all the -stations on the overland telegraph line. Alice Springs stands high -above the sea-level, and there is magnificent and interesting scenery -in the district, the valley in which it lies being of exceptional -beauty. - -As Edgar looked at the scene mapped out before him, he could not help -expressing astonishment at what he saw. Alice Springs he had imagined -as a bare, desolate spot, and here he saw the great MacDonnell Ranges -lying to the north, the source of rivers, creeks, and springs, the -valley stretching far away to east and west. The River Todd, running -close by, lends a picturesque charm to the scene. - -There were numerous people about when the party arrived, as Alice -Springs is the repeating station on the line, and consequently a -considerable number of officers were employed. The buildings were not -particularly enchanting, but they were useful and commodious. Several -trees were scattered about, affording a comfortable shade, and the hot -winds had not scorched up all vegetation. - -The officers employed at Alice Springs Station were a genial, jovial -lot of fellows; and when Edgar and Will had been duly introduced by -Walter Hepburn, they were at once made at home. After travelling -so many miles, and living on the produce of their guns and Yacka’s -ingenuity, it was a treat for them once more to come across -civilization. They were feasted and made much of, and the inevitable -race-meeting was got up in their honour. - -Edgar noticed there were a good many men about besides the officers -employed on the station, and he did not like the look of some of them. -They had a hang-dog expression on their faces, and a lazy, loafing way -of idling about that spoke ill for the manner in which they managed to -knock out a living. - -‘You have some queer customers about here,’ said Edgar to Walter -Hepburn. - -‘You mean those fellows over yonder,’ he replied. - -‘I guess you’re about right--they are queer customers. They are -out-and-out “spielers,” and you generally find them loafing about in -the interior wherever there is a new settlement. They are always in -fairly strong force around here, and when we have races they are only -too ready to make wagers which they have no intention of paying. Some -of our fellows are foolish enough to bet with them, and out of sheer -despair at getting up a game of cards, I have known them play with -these men. Needless to say, our fellows never win. These “spielers” -know too much for them. In my opinion, they are worse than the blacks, -and a greater danger to settlers. Horse-stealing and swindling they are -always ready for; but they are cowards when fairly tackled, and soon -seek fresh fields when a place becomes too hot to hold them.’ - -‘Strange how such men can find occupation here,’ said Edgar. - -‘Well, you see, it’s this way,’ said Walter Hepburn. ‘Settlers in a -new country, where white men are scarce, and blacks are dangerous and -hostile, are only too glad to give a white man a welcome. No questions -are asked as to who or what the white man may be, but they take it for -granted his company must be an improvement on their black, quarrelsome -neighbours. I’ve known blackguards like those you see over yonder stay -at a place for a week, and then clear out with the best horses and -anything else they could conveniently take away.’ - -‘I saw a couple of them eyeing our horses over a short time back,’ said -Will Brown, who came up and heard the conversation. ‘Yacka says we had -better leave our horses behind when we go beyond the Ranges, and call -for them as we return; that is, if they will care to have them here.’ - -‘You can leave them with pleasure if you wish,’ said Walter Hepburn, -‘and I’ll promise to look after them for you as well as I can. You will -certainly not have much use for horses if you are going west after you -cross the ranges. It is, so far as we know, very little else but desert -between here and West Australia. As I told you before, I am afraid -you are undertaking a great risk, and all to very little purpose. You -may as well remain here a week or two, and then return south towards -Adelaide. You’ll have had enough of it when you reach there, without -going farther north.’ - -‘I’ll consult Yacka, and hear what he has to say,’ said Edgar, and -walked towards the black, leaving Will with Walter Hepburn. - -Edgar explained what Hepburn had said, and Yacka replied: - -‘I will go with you to Adelaide, if you wish; but you will be sorry -for it. We have come so far, let us go on. These men know nothing of -Enooma’s country. They have been lost in the desert and never found the -green land. Come with me, and I will show you much. Yacka has said he -will make you rich. Come and see if the son of Enooma speaks true.’ - -‘You say we had better leave our horses here until we return,’ said -Edgar. ‘How far have we to go beyond the ranges?’ - -‘Long way,’ said Yacka, ‘but fine country. We soon leave the sand -behind, and then you will see much better place than Yanda.’ - -‘I will go with you,’ said Edgar, and Yacka was pleased. ‘We will leave -here in a few days.’ - -During the time they remained at Alice Springs there was plenty of -amusement. Local races, and a cricket match filled in the time, and -Edgar managed to impress it upon them that he could handle a bat. - -Yacka amused himself in various ways. He kept aloof from everyone, -and sat looking on at the various games in a contemplative style that -amused Edgar. - -The numerous ‘spielers’ about the place found time hang heavily on -their hands, and two or three of them thought to pass a few hours away -by teasing Yacka, and trying to work him into a frenzy. These vile -wretches were adepts in the art of ill-using and insulting not only -blacks, but white men, when they got the chance, and when there was but -little danger connected with it. - -Yacka was quietly carving a stick, when three of these vagabonds came -up to him. One jerked the stick out of his hand and flung it away, -another upset the log upon which he was sitting, and the third kicked -him in the ribs as he lay on the floor. - -Then these three white men with black hearts got a surprise from the -black man with a white heart. Yacka sprang to his feet with a yell. He -seized the nearest man round the waist, lifted him off his feet, and -flung him over his shoulder, as easily as only a practised wrestler -could. The man fell with a heavy thud upon the ground and lay there. -Yacka bounded upon the next man before he had recovered from his -surprise, and would have treated him in a similar way. The noise, -however, attracted the attention of the ‘spielers’ mates, who came -running up, and Yacka was surrounded by enemies. - -The black’s eyes fairly blazed as he looked round at the cowardly crew -hemming him in on every side. He could not see a loophole of escape, so -he determined to fight for liberty. Yacka knew well enough if these men -got him down he would probably be kicked to death. - -A blow on the back of his head warned him his persecutors meant -business. Yacka could see no weapon handy, so he used his fists, and -struck out right and left with tremendous effect. Three of the crew -measured their full length on the ground in almost as many seconds. -Yacka’s blows fell fast, but he could not guard himself at the rear as -well as in the front. Blows fell upon his head and made him dizzy, and -he knew he could not hold out much longer. - -‘There’s a row going on outside,’ said Walter Hepburn, as he got up -from the table where they had just been refreshing themselves, and went -to the door. - -‘Hang me if it is not that black chap of yours! The “spielers” are on -to him. Come along, quick, or they’ll do for him!’ - -Edgar and Will jumped up, and the three ran towards the scene of the -encounter. - -They were only just in time. One of the gang of cowards attacking Yacka -struck him a severe blow on the head with a heavy stick, and the black -fell on to his knees. No sooner was he down than a brutal assault was -made upon him. Edgar outstripped his companions and was first on the -scene. He said nothing, but he began to knock the ‘spielers’ about in a -manner that left no doubt as to his hitting powers. - -Will Brown and Walter Hepburn were not slow to follow his example, and -although they were opposed to more than double their own number, the -trio quickly drove the ‘spielers’ away, some of them much the worse for -the encounter. - -Edgar knelt down beside Yacka, who was lying on the ground half stunned. - -‘The brutes!’ said Edgar. ‘They have mauled him badly. How do you feel, -Yacka? Any bones broken?’ - -The black smiled feebly and said: - -‘No bones broken, Master Edgar, but I have got a bad head. I could -have beaten the first three, but more came up and they got at me from -behind.’ Seeing Hepburn, he added significantly: ‘That is what causes -revenge, and the killing of white men.’ - -‘I’m not surprised,’ said Will. ‘You cannot expect a blackfellow to -stand such brutal conduct as this.’ - -‘No,’ said Hepburn, ‘but the worst of it is the innocent suffer for the -guilty. These brutes get off scot-free, and some poor settler meets -with his death.’ - -‘Yacka has never killed a man what you call a settler,’ said the black. - -‘No one supposes you have,’ said Edgar. ‘Can you walk?’ - -Yacka managed to stand on his feet, but his head swam, and he felt -dizzy. - -‘Bring him into my shanty,’ said Hepburn. ‘I can’t stand even a -blackfellow being knocked about in this style.’ - -The ‘spielers’ were hanging about as they led Yacka into Hepburn’s -house. As he entered the door the black turned and shook his fist at -them, and a cruel look came into his eyes. - -Hepburn saw it and whispered to Edgar: - -‘I would not give much for one of those fellows’ chances of salvation -if Yacka got him alone.’ - -Had it been a white man the ‘spielers’ had set upon, they would have -been hustled out of the place quickly enough, but a blackfellow more -or less did not seem to matter with the bulk of the men. The majority -of them would have knocked a ‘spieler’ down with the greatest of -satisfaction, but even in such a case as the assault upon Yacka they -were inclined to regard the black as the aggressor. This feeling -naturally aroused Edgar’s indignation. He had not lived amongst -savage blacks as most of these men had, and gone with his life in his -hands every time he went a few miles up country. The blacks in many -cases undoubtedly attacked peaceful settlers and murdered them in a -treacherous manner. This naturally aroused a feeling of intense hatred -against the original inhabitants of the country, and all blackfellows -were treated alike. When the settlers treated the blacks kindly it was -regarded by them as a sign of weakness, and an encouragement to attack -them. Arguments such as these Hepburn used to convince Edgar the white -men had good reason for hating the black. - -‘The Finke blacks,’ said Hepburn, ‘are a peaceable lot; but when you -get into the Musgrave and MacDonnell Ranges, and farther north, it -is necessary to be well armed if you wish to come back again. I have -been there and know, and that is the main reason I have endeavoured to -persuade you not to go with Yacka.’ - -‘It would be cowardly on our part to desert Yacka now,’ said Edgar, -‘nor have we any inclination to do so. I would sooner trust a whole -tribe of blacks than the brutal fellows who attacked him.’ - -Hepburn saw it was useless to argue more, so he said good-naturedly: - -‘If you are bent upon proceeding, you must let me supply you with more -ammunition. You will want it, I am afraid, unless Yacka is well-known -to the northern tribes.’ - -‘You’re a brick!’ said Will enthusiastically, ‘and I for one will -accept your gift.’ - -‘It’s a good while since I heard that expression,’ said Hepburn. ‘It -reminds me of my school-days.’ - -‘Where were you put in training?’ asked Edgar with a smile. - -‘At a grand old school, which I dare say you have heard of,’ said -Hepburn. ‘I was educated at Redbank.’ - -Edgar and Will gave a whoop that startled Hepburn, and before he could -realize what had happened, he felt both his arms being worked up and -down in a rapid style that took his breath away. - -‘Hold on, lads!’ he gasped; ‘you’ll have my arms off. What the deuce is -the matter with you?’ - -‘This is the most extraordinary thing I ever heard of,’ said Edgar. - -‘I see nothing very extraordinary in my having been educated at -Redbank,’ said Hepburn, ‘except the fact that I might have done the -school more credit, considering the training I received.’ - -‘We are Redbank boys,’ said Edgar. - -It was Hepburn’s turn now, and the pumping process recommenced. They -almost danced for joy, and Yacka, who was lying on the camp-bed, -thought they had gone suddenly mad. - -‘Bless my soul! it is remarkable after all,’ said Hepburn. ‘To think we -Redbank fellows should all meet in this outlandish spot! The world is -very small.’ - -What a night they made of it, and they were still talking over the -glories of Redbank when the morning light made the lamp grow dim. - - - - -CHAPTER XV. THROUGH THE RANGES. - - -Edgar Foster learned that Walter Hepburn had gone to Redbank a term -or two after his father left the school. Hepburn was therefore well -acquainted with the prowess of Edgar’s father in the cricket-field. It -seemed very strange that they should all meet at Alice Springs, and it -was a date to be noted as a red-letter day when the discovery was made. -Had Walter Hepburn been free to leave his post, he would, after finding -out they were Redbank boys, have joined them in their travels farther -north. School ties bind men fast together, especially when such a good -feeling existed as always did amongst Redbank lads. - -The time came for parting, and when Yacka was sufficiently recovered -they left the station amidst general regret, and a universally -expressed wish to see them safe back again. - -Yacka was quite himself as soon as all traces of civilization were -left behind. Once in the ranges he revelled in the mountain air, and -appeared familiar with every pathway. In one place they had a difficult -task to perform. Yacka led them up to a gigantic cleft in the rocks, -which towered high above them on either side. Between these high, rocky -walls flowed a river, and up it Yacka said they must swim. - -‘It will save a big climb over the rocks,’ he said, ‘and I can take -your clothes on my head.’ - -There was nothing for it but to strip, and Edgar and Will were not -averse to a good swim. - -Yacka tied their clothes in a bundle, and placing the guns on the top, -put them all on his head, far out of the reach of the water. He had -tied the bundle under his chin with a strap, and it was marvellous to -watch how he swam up the river with such a load on his head. - -Edgar and Will plunged in after him, and found the water very cold; but -the exertion of swimming kept the circulation of their blood up. - -‘By Jove! it was a cold bath,’ said Will, as he stood drying himself in -the sun. ‘It must be the rocks make it like iced-water.’ - -‘Very refreshing on a hot day,’ said Edgar. ‘They would give a trifle -to have such a cool bathing-place at Yanda.’ - -As they proceeded they came across a number of watercourses and hills -and valleys. They climbed to the top of high rocks, and descended again -into level lands. At sundown they were tired out, and could hardly -eat the supper Yacka prepared for them. No sooner had they finished -their meal than they were sound asleep. But Yacka did not sleep; he -stood looking down at them with his big eyes, and seemed to be in deep -thought. The moonlight showed his black form standing over the two -sleepers, and his attitude was one of dejection. - -‘How white they are,’ he muttered, ‘and Yacka so black! but they are -not as white as Enooma, and Yacka is her son.’ - -He sat down, and commenced to reason in his own way as to why he should -be black, and the two sleepers white. He could find no satisfactory -solution to the problem. Yacka knew naught of the white man’s God, but -he had a wonderful amount of superstition in his nature, and a firm -belief that the White Spirit watched over him. Yacka had no fear of -death; he would have laughed at such a thought, and yet he did not -understand what death really meant. Had the blackfellow been able to -express what he really thought about death, it would have been to the -effect that it was merely the White Spirit’s way of rewarding him for -his work here by carrying him off to a country where he would be happy -for ever. Yacka slept but little that night, but he was awake early, -and ready to start again. - -The ranges were passed, and they were now in more open country. On the -lowlands were numerous bushes, mulga on the hills, and gum and tea tree -in the creeks. Plains of salt-bush could be seen, but on to the west -they descried grass-land. - -For several days they tramped on, living on the simplest fare, and yet -feeling strong and well, and fit for almost any exertion. - -‘Where are all the blacks we heard so much about?’ said Edgar. ‘We have -met none yet.’ - -‘We shall be in the Enooma country by sunset to-morrow,’ said Yacka; -‘then you will see men of my tribe.’ - -Yacka spoke truly. The next night they came across a blacks’ camp. To -Edgar’s surprise there were between two and three hundred of them. As -they approached Yacka made a peculiar sound like the shrill cry of a -parrot, only with quite a different note, which roused the blacks, and -several rushed forward to meet them. - -When they saw Yacka the effect was astonishing. At first they looked at -him in amazement, then an old man cried aloud, ‘Yacka! Yacka! Enooma! -Enooma!’ and the whole of the blacks, surrounding him, knelt before him. - -There was a proud look on Yacka’s face as he motioned them to rise. -Then he spoke rapidly in the native tongue, and pointed to Edgar and -Will. - -The blacks gave vent to warlike cries, and, shaking their wooden -spears high in the air, drove them into the ground with terrific force. - -‘That means they will kill any man who does you harm,’ said Yacka. ‘You -are safe here, and the whole tribe will protect you.’ - -They moved towards the camp, and at their approach the blacks stood up -and awaited their coming with eager and excited looks. - -Yacka was known to them, and was evidently an important man with the -tribe. Edgar fancied they regarded him with something akin to fear, and -said to Will: - -‘We were right to trust Yacka, for these blacks stand in awe of him, -and we shall be safe with them.’ - -‘They are a savage-looking lot,’ said Will, ‘and I should not care -to have come amongst them alone. If these are the men who molest the -settlers, I am not surprised at the white men hating them.’ - -The blacks were tall, powerful men, of a far different stamp to those -in the west of New South Wales. Yacka was small beside some of them, -and many were six feet high and over. They were all armed with native -weapons, and were well prepared for any encounter. As they were in -such strong force, Edgar came to the conclusion they must be on the -war-path, and questioned Yacka. - -‘They are always armed,’ said Yacka. ‘The Curracoo tribe are their -deadly enemies, and when they meet they fight.’ - -‘I never heard of that tribe,’ said Edgar. - -‘The Enooma and the Curracoo are not known except in this part of -Australia,’ said Yacka. ‘They are tribes of the MacDonnell and Musgrave -blacks. They fight savagely. The Curracoo wish to seize the white -spirit of the Enooma, and think to capture her; but they know nothing -of our country, nor of the caves we are going to.’ - -The blacks regarded Edgar and Will with much curiosity, and from the -manner in which many of them pointed at their own bodies and then at -Edgar’s, he thought they could not have seen many white men. It was a -strange sensation for the two friends to lie awake in the midst of a -camp of over two hundred savage blacks, and wonder what was about to -happen. - -Early in the morning they were aroused by loud warlike cries, and Yacka -hurried up to them and said: - -‘Follow me; the Curracoo are at hand, and there will be a fight.’ - -‘And if the Enooma are beaten, what will become of us?’ said Will. - -‘The Enooma will win,’ said Yacka. ‘If beaten, Yacka can save you.’ - -He led them to a small hill not far distant from the camp, and bade -them remain until his return. - -‘You can see the fight,’ he said, ‘and there is no danger.’ - -‘This is a lively situation,’ said Edgar. ‘With all due respect to -Yacka, if his tribe is defeated, the Curracoo will make short work of -us.’ - -‘There they are!’ said Will, pointing excitedly to a dark mass moving -across the open country. - -‘It seems to me there are some hundreds of them,’ said Edgar; ‘far more -than the Enooma. This is a poor look-out, Will. We must be prepared to -fight for our lives.’ - -As they stood on the rising ground they had a splendid view of the -plain below, and were soon absorbed in the scene before them. The two -bodies of blacks were approaching nearer and nearer, and neither tribe -shirked an encounter. They could see Yacka standing some distance -apart, and evidently directing the movements of the Enooma. - -‘Yacka has learned something in the big cities,’ said Edgar; ‘look -where he has sent about fifty men round that clump of trees, where they -are hidden from the enemy. They intend to make an attack on the rear -that will prove successful.’ - -Suddenly, and without a moment’s warning, the whole scene changed. On -the plain, that a moment before had contained two bodies of blacks -advancing towards each other, there was now a confused mass of figures, -uttering terrible cries and fighting like furies. The sound of blows -could be heard above the din, and the grass was dotted with the forms -of fallen blacks. They were at too close quarters for spears, and -were using heavy nulla-nullas, and warding off the blows with wooden -shields. - -They saw Yacka quietly surveying the scene, and wondered why he did not -join in. - -‘He is waiting for a favourable opportunity,’ said Edgar. ‘Those men -behind the trees have not moved yet.’ - -The cries of the fighting blacks became more and more wild and furious. -They looked like fiends dancing about in a frenzy, and dealing blows -on every hand. One huge fellow, a chief of the Enooma, did terrible -execution with an enormous weapon which he whirled about like a -battle-axe, and Edgar and Will watched him with a fascination that -deadened all sense of their own danger if the tribe suffered defeat. - -‘Look at him!’ said Edgar. ‘He’s mowing them down like grass. No one -can stand in his way. His wrist play is splendid--it reminds me of club -exercise at school.’ - -‘It’s a trifle more exciting than that,’ said Will. ‘What strength -the fellow has! He could fell an ox with one of those terrible blows. -Nothing can stop him.’ - -As though to give the lie to his words, a black, nearly as big as the -Enooma chief, barred his way, and a desperate combat took place. Both -men had wooden shields with which they dexterously warded off the -blows. They were evenly matched, although the Enooma black was a shade -taller than his opponent. Both were mad with rage and thirst for blood, -and it was a duel to the death. - -‘He’s down!’ shouted Edgar, as the Enooma chief slipped; but it was -only a feint, as the black, dodging a blow aimed at his head by his -opponent, suddenly raised himself. The Curracoo overbalanced himself -with the force of the blow, and fell forward. As he stumbled along, the -Enooma, raising his huge club on high, brought it down with tremendous -force on the back of the Curracoo’s head. Where they stood they could -hear the blow, and Edgar shuddered as he saw the black’s head split -open, and he fell dead on the ground. - -Seeing their champion killed, the Curracoo wavered; and, seizing this -favourable opportunity, Yacka, uttering a loud war-yell, sprang forward -and called upon the men in ambush to follow him. In a few minutes the -Enooma blacks were furiously attacking the Curracoos in the rear. -Unaccustomed to these tactics, the Curracoos were terrified, and at -once tried to run away from the danger. This, however, was impossible; -they were hemmed in on all sides, and by merciless foes who knew not -the meaning of the word ‘quarter.’ It was a fearful sight to see these -blacks felled to the ground by the heavy blows rained upon them on all -sides. The Enooma were bent upon slaughter, and killed their enemies -without mercy. The plain had every appearance of a battle-field, and in -some places half a dozen blacks were piled in a heap, dead. - -At a signal from Yacka the Enooma ceased fighting, and, surrounding the -blacks still left alive, held them prisoners. These men were disarmed -and marched off towards the camp. A few of the Curracoos could be seen -flying from the scene of the battle which had proved so fatal to them, -but comparatively few of them escaped. - -Yacka came to Edgar and Will, and they saw he was almost covered with -blood, and his club was dripping dark-red drops. The black’s eyes shone -with the light of battle and thirst for blood. All the savage nature of -this strange being was roused, and the cruelty in him was uppermost. He -shook the blood-stained club over his head, and said: - -‘Victory to the Enooma. There has been a terrible slaughter. Come and -see. Yacka will show you how the Enooma strike their enemies.’ - -Edgar and Will descended from the hill where they had witnessed the -fight, and followed Yacka on to the field of battle. - - - - -CHAPTER XVI. AFTER THE FIGHT. - - -It was indeed a terrible sight the two friends gazed upon. On the -ground where the fight had furiously raged lay scores of dead blacks in -all attitudes, just as they had fallen. It made them shudder to look -at the scene. The terrific nature of the blows dealt was apparent, for -most of the dead had their skulls fractured, and their features were -ghastly and distorted. Their weapons lay near them, and Edgar picked -up the club which the powerful black who fought the Enooma chief had -used. It was a great weight, and fully three feet long, and capable of -dealing a fearful blow, even in a weak man’s hands. The end was covered -with blood and hair, showing that the Curracoo had killed many enemies -before he was slain. - -‘You will bury these men?’ asked Edgar. - -‘The Enooma must have burial,’ said Yacka; ‘the Curracoo are not fit to -be hidden away;’ and he struck a fallen black, who still showed signs -of life, over the head with his club. - -‘That was a cowardly thing to do,’ said Edgar. - -‘They are not fit to live,’ said Yacka, and went on. - -‘What a brute he is, after all!’ said Will, in a low voice. ‘He is no -better than the others.’ - -‘He is a savage at heart,’ said Edgar, ‘and we must make allowances for -him.’ - -‘If he kills defenceless men like that,’ said Will, ‘I would not give -much for our lives if he felt disposed to turn upon us.’ - -‘He will not do that,’ said Edgar. ‘We are his friends, these men his -enemies. Had the Curracoo won, they would have treated the Enooma in -the same way. This savage warfare is the same the world over, I expect. -It is a horrible sight.’ - -‘Over a hundred killed,’ said Yacka, with a savage smile; ‘and we have -many prisoners.’ - -‘Shall you kill the prisoners?’ asked Edgar. - -‘Yes; and leave them as a warning to the tribe.’ - -‘How will they be put to death?’ asked Edgar, who had read of the -tortures inflicted by savages in Africa and elsewhere. - -‘That will be decided,’ said Yacka. ‘The Enooma know how to kill their -enemies.’ - -After a gruesome tramp over the battle-field, they returned to the -camp. The victorious Enooma were already commencing to celebrate their -triumph. - -Edgar saw a group of prisoners, about forty or fifty in number, bound -with thongs made of some kind of reed or long grass. They all looked -terror-stricken, and evidently knew what was in store for them. - -‘Poor wretches!’ said Will. ‘It would be a kindness to shoot them.’ - -‘We must not interfere,’ said Edgar. ‘It would be risking our lives to -do so. Even Yacka would not stand that.’ - -‘You saw a dance at Yanda,’ said Yacka. ‘You will see a genuine war -dance soon.’ - -Towards night the big men of the tribe assembled round Yacka, and all -squatted on the ground. - -‘They are deciding the fate of the prisoners,’ said Will. ‘I hope it -will not be very awful.’ - -The consultation did not last long, and Yacka came towards them. He -seemed pleased at the prospect before him, and laughed harshly. - -‘It is good,’ he said. ‘All die a dog’s death.’ - -‘Will they be hanged?’ asked Will. - -‘Some,’ said Yacka. ‘Wait and see.’ - -There were many trees near the camp, and they had big white branches a -good height from the ground. Ten of the Curracoos were brought forward -and thrown down under the trees. They were then raised feet first, and -bound with their heads downwards round the trunks of the trees. Others -were drawn up, feet foremost, over the branches, and left hanging with -their heads touching the feet of the others. - -Edgar protested to Yacka, but he took no notice. The black was looking -at the fearful scene with savage delight. There was no mercy to be got -out of Yacka, so Edgar did not speak to him again. - -Other blacks were brought to these trees, cast down on their faces, and -spears were driven through their backs, pinning them to the ground in -such a manner that they could not get free. Their cries were fearful, -and made the place seem like a hell upon earth. Some of the cruelties -were too fearful to relate, and yet Yacka watched it all with fiendish -glee. When the last prisoner had been tortured and left to die a -lingering death, Yacka was satisfied. - -‘We cannot trust you after what we have seen,’ said Edgar. ‘We shall go -back. Guide us to Alice Springs; if not, we must risk it, and go alone.’ - -Yacka was dumfounded. He could not understand the reason of their -distrust in him. He had acted according to the customs of his tribe, -and knew, had the Curracoo won, the Enooma would have been treated in -a similar way. It was the fortune of war. The Enooma had gained the -victory; why should the white men mistrust him because the tribe had -taken their just revenge? - -‘Yacka is your friend,’ said the black. ‘You have come to no harm. We -make war in our own way. You kill many men with big guns. I have seen -them fired. They kill many at one shot. It is more terrible than our -wars.’ - -‘We do not torture prisoners,’ said Edgar. ‘You are no better than -these savages.’ - -‘I am the son of Enooma,’ said Yacka; ‘therefore I am the head of them. -The head guides the body. I am the chief, the king, and I am above them -all.’ - -‘You are as cruel as they are,’ said Edgar. ‘If you are the King of the -Enooma, why did you not kill these men at once, not torture them?’ - -‘It is the will of Enooma,’ said Yacka, ‘and she must be obeyed.’ - -‘The White Spirit would never allow men to be tortured,’ said Edgar. -‘There is no White Spirit over the Enooma; it is a black spirit, and -full of evil.’ - -‘You saved Yacka’s life,’ said the black, ‘and he is grateful. If my -tribe know you call Enooma a black spirit, Yacka could not save you. -Follow me. It is not far. Yacka will lead you back when you have looked -upon the White Spirit, and seen the gold and beautiful stones.’ - -The agonized groans of the tortured blacks sounded terrible, and Edgar -said: - -‘Kill these men, and we will go with you.’ - -Yacka hesitated, and Edgar, noticing it, said: - -‘I took your hand in friendship; now it is stained in blood. Kill these -men, and I will forgive you, and the White Spirit will be glad.’ - -‘It shall be,’ said Yacka, and moved away towards the camp. - -How he prevailed upon the tribe he did not say, but the tortured men -were killed, and their groans ceased, much to Edgar’s relief. - -After this experience, there was no telling what might happen if -another encounter took place with a hostile tribe, and the Enooma were -defeated. Yacka, however, had no intention of proceeding alone, and -Edgar and Will found the tribe was to accompany them. Marching many -miles a day in the company of a tribe of warlike blacks was a novel -experience. Edgar had many opportunities of noting how they lived and -their habits. He soon learned that the Enooma were excellent marksmen, -and could throw a spear with as great accuracy as he could shoot. They -used their boomerangs dexterously. - -Yacka was an adept at throwing this peculiar weapon, which is almost -in the shape of a half crescent, and is made of very hard wood, smooth -and shaved down to a sharp edge on the inside curve. Yacka could throw -his boomerang high into the air, until it appeared a mere speck, and it -came down in a series of curves until it fell at his feet. No matter -how far he threw the boomerang, it invariably returned to him. - -The first time Edgar attempted throwing a boomerang he was rather -astonished. Instead of going high into the air, it gave a few curves, -then flew rapidly backwards, and Edgar had to duck his head quickly to -avoid a blow. - -‘It is not so easy as it looks,’ he said to Will. ‘Have a try?’ - -Will took the weapon and tried, with no better result; in fact, he came -off worse than Edgar, for he got a severe blow on the shin. The blacks -were amused at the white men’s clumsy attempts to throw the boomerang, -and their grins of satisfaction exasperated Edgar. - -‘They imagine we can do nothing in this line,’ he said to Will. ‘We -must undeceive them, or they will have a very poor opinion of us. We -have not many shots to spare; but it may be as well to show them how -deadly a gun is.’ - -Edgar explained to Yacka that it was not fair the blacks should have it -all their own way. - -‘Throw your boomerang, and I’ll engage to hit it in the air,’ said -Edgar. - -Yacka did not care to risk his own boomerang, which was carved in a -fantastic manner, so he took another, and, after telling the blacks -what Edgar was about to do, he flung it into the air. - -As it came circling down Edgar fired and hit it, but it did not split -with the shot; the marks, however, were plainly visible, and the blacks -were not only terrified at the noise, but amazed at the result. It was -Will’s turn next, and he elected to try his luck with the revolver. - -Yacka fastened one of the blacks’ loin-cloths to a tree, doubling it -into a small space. These cloths were made of thick skin, probably -kangaroo, and when doubled it offered strong resistance to a bullet. - -Will fired at twenty paces. The bullet passed through the skin and -flattened against the tree. On seeing this, the blacks regarded the -revolver with much interest, but would not handle it. - -The Enooma blacks were athletic fellows, and could run, jump, and -wrestle in a manner that surprised Edgar, who knew a good deal about -such sports. - -In his Redbank days Edgar had run his hundred yards in even time, and -he was in splendid condition now. - -One of the Enooma, called Ouwana, they noticed was a fine runner, and -Will suggested Edgar should try his speed against him. - -Yacka, as usual, arranged matters. - -Ouwana was a tall, lithe-limbed black, about twenty years old, and with -a less repulsive cast of countenance than many of his tribe. He was -quite willing to run Edgar, and Will measured out the distance as near -as he could stride it. - -Yacka acted as starter, the signal being a loud clap of the hands, and -Will was judge. The blacks grew quite excited over the race. - -Yacka’s hands met with a crack like a pistol, and, trained as he had -been to start smartly, Edgar gained a slight advantage. He ran his -best, but before he had gone fifty yards it was a hopeless case, as -Ouwana passed him like a flash, and simply won hands down. - -Edgar was amazed, not so much at being beaten, as by the easy way in -which it was done. - -‘He’s a champion,’ said Edgar. - -‘He would be good enough to win one of those big handicaps we saw -advertised in the Sydney paper before we left Yanda. How much was the -prize money?’ - -‘About six hundred pounds, I think,’ said Will; ‘I wish we had Ouwana -there.’ - -‘So do I,’ said Edgar; ‘it would be rare fun to see the black fellow -“down” the cracks.’ - -The days passed quickly, and Edgar and Will had no thought of time. -They did not even know what month it was, and were dead out of their -reckoning as regards the days of the week. - -What surprised them most was the fertile nature of the country. They -had passed across a vast sandy plain, and taken some days to do it, -but ever since they left it behind they had been tramping over what -Edgar knew would not only be excellent sheep country, but would also -carry cattle. Grass was plentiful--not brown, dry grass, but green and -juicy--proving there had either been recent rain, or there was plenty -of moisture in the earth. - -It was not a flat, dull, and uninteresting country, for there were -hills and valleys, and trees and shrubs, and beautiful wild flowers and -blossoming trees were found in many places. Wild berries and fruits -they found, and running streams of water, which seemed to find their -source in the many caves with which the mountains were honeycombed. In -some of these streams, which at times were sufficiently large to be -called rivers, crocodiles were found, both large and small. The larger -crocodile was voracious, and it was not safe to bathe when any of them -showed their ugly heads, but the smaller species was harmless, and -never ventured to attack them. - -The Enooma blacks were fond of the water, and often risked their lives -bathing and swimming where crocodiles were to be seen. - -Ouwana was especially venturesome, and often speared a crocodile in the -water. - -Yacka said he had seen Ouwana fight a crocodile, with a shortened spear -like a dagger, for the mere excitement of the sport. - -Edgar managed to further earn the goodwill of the blacks by saving -Ouwana’s life. - -The black dived into the stream, and was swimming in the centre, when a -huge crocodile appeared close beside him. The hideous creature opened -its monster jaws, showing great ugly teeth, and in another moment -would have ended Ouwana’s career. Edgar luckily had his gun with him, -and, taking a steady aim with the barrel used for ball, fired. The -crocodile sank like a stone. - -Ouwana was unaware of his danger, and at first thought Edgar had fired -at him. This roused all the ferociousness in the black’s nature, and it -would have gone hard with Edgar had Yacka not come up and explained. - -When Ouwana found out what Edgar had done he showed his repentance for -doubting him, and his thankfulness for his delivery from a fearful -death, by kneeling down and putting both arms round Edgar’s legs. He -then looked up into his face with such sorrowful eyes that Edgar patted -his woolly head, much as he would have done that of a big dog. - - - - -CHAPTER XVII. WONDROUS CAVERNS. - - -‘Look!’ said Yacka, pointing to a range of hills in the distance. -‘There you will find the cave of the White Spirit, and your journey -will be ended.’ - -Gazing in the direction the black indicated, they saw hill upon hill -towering one above the other like a number of huge pyramids. It was a -strange sight in this wild country, where it was doubtful if ever a -white man had set foot before. - -They were all eagerness to continue the journey, but Yacka said this -could not be. Certain forms and ceremonies were to be gone through -before he could venture with them into the hills and caves where -Enooma, the White Spirit, lay at rest. Only the head of the tribe was -permitted to enter the cave, and so superstitious were the blacks upon -this point, that they believed it meant certain death to anyone of -their number who disobeyed. Consequently Yacka would have no difficulty -in showing Edgar and Will what the cave contained, as he alone could -enter. - -Yacka had stated to the tribe that the white men were come to see -Enooma, who was of the same race, and therefore they must be permitted -to enter the cave. - -At the foot of the nearest hill--it could almost be called a -mountain--they halted, and the blacks commenced a wild, weird chant -which sounded like the wail of lost spirits. They prostrated themselves -upon the ground, and made signs with their spears. - -Yacka stepped on ahead, and beckoned to Edgar and Will to follow, which -they did without hesitation. The other blacks came on at a respectful -distance, and seemed afraid that something was about to happen. In the -side of the hill they were approaching, Edgar saw a large cleft in the -rock wide enough to admit half a dozen people to pass in abreast. These -hills were all solid rock, not merely mounds of earth, and were bare -in many places, while in fissures grew trees, and wild creepers hung -down in great profusion. Orchids were growing of exceptional beauty, -and Edgar, as he looked at them, thought of the price they would bring -in the old country. As they entered the cleft in the rock the blacks -remained behind, and squatted down on the ground. - -‘They guard the entrance,’ said Yacka. ‘When no one is here this -opening in the rock closes up, and no one can find the cave of Enooma.’ - -Edgar wondered how Yacka knew the cleft closed up if no one was there -to see such a strange thing happen. - -‘How can you tell that,’ he said, ‘if you have never seen it?’ - -‘Rest and listen,’ said Yacka: ‘You never believe I speak truth because -I am black. Once the Enooma were defeated by the Curracoo, and fled -before them to these hills. They were so hard-pressed that they had -to rush through the cleft in the rock, and when the last of the tribe -passed in the cleft closed and shut the Curracoo out. This is true, for -men of the tribe have told me, and they do not lie to the chief.’ - -Edgar believed this to be another superstition of the blacks, but he -could not resist looking behind him towards the cleft they had entered -by. With a loud cry he sprang to his feet, for behind them there was a -solid rock, and he could see nothing of the blacks they had left. Will -looked, and turned pale as he saw they were shut in. - -‘How is this?’ said Edgar. ‘What has happened?’ - -‘Enooma has closed her gate,’ said Yacka. ‘She knows of the approach of -her son and the white men, and she wishes to be undisturbed.’ - -Edgar walked back to where he imagined the cleft in the rock by which -they entered had been, but he could see nothing but a solid mass in -front of him. He felt the rock and it was hard and firm, and must have -been there for ages. How had this strange thing happened? Yacka must -have suddenly turned as they walked along, and the opening become -hidden, but as they entered the black appeared to have gone straight on. - -‘I give it up,’ said Edgar. ‘We seem to be blocked in here, and shall -have to trust to Yacka to get us out. It makes a fellow feel queer when -such strange things happen, but I have no doubt there is an explanation -of it if we can find it out.’ - -The place they were now standing in was a narrow defile between rocks -towering up perpendicularly to a considerable height. These rocks were -bare and smooth, and not a plant or fern could be seen growing on the -sides. Before them was the mouth of a cave, and inside seemed dark as -pitch. Yacka walked to the mouth of the cave, and they followed him. -When they became accustomed to the gloom, they saw a faint glimmer -of light, about the size of a bull’s-eye lantern glass, in the far -distance. So far as Edgar could make out, the sides of the cave were -rocks, but smoothed in a similar way to those on either side of the -defile they had left. The floor of the cave was hard and even, in some -places so smooth that it became slippery and dangerous. Yacka did not -speak, but kept moving slowly forward, and they could see the dim -outline of his figure. - -‘It must have been the action of water for ages that has made the floor -so smooth,’ said Edgar. ‘How cold it is after the heat we have had! -Reminds me of a petrifying cave. I believe if we remained here long -enough we should be turned into stone.’ - -‘I have no desire to be turned into a petrified mummy at present,’ said -Will laughing; ‘but you’re right about the cold--I am chilled to the -bone.’ - -‘How much more of this is there, Yacka?’ said Edgar, speaking loud -enough for the black, who was some way in front, to hear him. - -The sound of his voice echoed through the passage, and gradually died -away in the distance. - -‘Wait,’ said Yacka. ‘Be careful here.’ - -They had need of the warning, for they were now treading upon something -soft and slimy, and the sensation was not pleasant. They slipped about -and made but little progress, and were glad when the ground felt hard -and dry again. - -The round ball of light at the end was gradually widening, and they -could now see more plainly the nature of the passage they were -traversing. Looking up to the roof Edgar saw thousands of glittering -stars, which flashed and twinkled even with the faint light from the -opening. - -‘Look, Will,’ he said; ‘how lovely this roof would be if there was more -light! They might be diamonds, they sparkle so.’ - -‘Wish they were,’ replied Will. ‘A few diamonds would help a fellow -along--you know in what direction I mean.’ - -‘Yacka has promised to make us rich. I wonder if he will let us take -what we like if there is anything to take?’ - -It was a mass of various-coloured stalactites on the roof that had -attracted Edgar’s attention, and as they got more light in the passage -they were seen in all their beauty. The sides were also covered with -curiously-twisted and gnarled designs. As they neared the opening they -saw the sun was shining brightly, and that they were about to enter an -open space. They were not, however, prepared for the sight that burst -upon their astonished gaze as they stepped out of the darkness into the -full light of the sun. Yacka watched them with a delighted expression -in his eyes, and had evidently anticipated the surprise he was about to -give them. - -They were so charmed with the scene that they sat down and looked upon -it without saying a word. The spot they were in was like a large basin -hollowed out of the solid rocks. The sides sloped down gradually, and -were hollowed out at the base. Had there been tiers of seats round, it -would have resembled in shape a vast amphitheatre. There was, however, -something far more picturesque than bare seats round this wonderful -circle. The whole of the basin was covered with a kind of green moss, -which looked like velvet as the sun shone upon it. - -This velvet bed was studded with a profusion of flowers of all colours, -shapes, and sizes. Brilliant orchids selected the most shady nooks to -fix their abode in. Huge white convolvulus spread over projections and -clumps; lilies of great height filled in spaces where water lodged, and -gently trickled down into a pool in the hollow of the basin. Great nest -ferns surrounded the water, their fronds, over six feet long, spreading -out like large fans. The miniata had its large carmine blossoms showing -to perfection, the colour being dazzling. Pandanus and screw palms also -grew amongst the giant ferns and lilies. Floating on the water in the -basin were gigantic water-lilies. - -So scooped out was this basin, that there was an ample shade for the -numerous ferns and lilies that do not flourish with the full light of -the sun upon them. Surrounded by such lovely flowers and ferns, and -with a cool pool of water to make everything refreshing, it is small -wonder, after their recent experiences, that Edgar and Will fancied -themselves in an enchanted spot. How it all came here no one could -fathom. Nature fixes upon strange spots in which to work at her best. -All they knew and cared about was that in an unexplored part of -Australia they had come upon such a wonderful scene. - -Yacka assured them this was a mere nothing when compared with the cave -of Enooma. - -The place they were now in he described as the bathing-place of Enooma, -and said the waters from the caves did not run into this place. - -‘You can drink this water,’ said Yacka, ‘but not that in the caves. It -is bitter, and will turn the tongue hard, and you will have no taste.’ - -It always struck Edgar as curious that, no matter where they happened -to be, Yacka could invariably procure them a good meal. Even in this -spot, where it did not seem likely they would be able to find much to -relieve their hunger, Yacka got berries and roots, some water from the -pool, and made quite a pleasant, and what proved to be a strengthening, -drink. He also gave them a root which he said would appease hunger for -a time whenever tasted. - -Yacka would not allow them to linger here, but walked round the basin. - -Edgar saw no outlet except the one by which they had entered. At the -far side Yacka pulled aside the dense masses of ferns, and they saw an -opening large enough to admit of a man crawling through. Yacka went -first, and they followed on their hands and knees. - -This passage was about fifty yards in length, and at the other end -was an open cave, which was lighted by a hole in the roof, naturally -formed. Gliding down the walls were glistening drops of water, and -the floor was very uneven, and covered with masses of rock that must -at some remote period have become detached from the roof. Some of the -tracery on the walls Edgar looked at with wonder. It was of a rich -cream colour, and almost like the texture of a cashmere shawl. - -All sorts of shapes and figures could be seen caused by the action of -the water, which must have taken thousands of years to perform its -work, and would take thousands more years to complete it. Hanging from -the roof were large pendants like icicles, and the water ran slowly -down them and dripped off at the end. The hollow underneath caused by -these drips showed the extreme age of the cave. - -Leaning against the side of the cave Edgar saw close to him what at -first looked like a bunch of grapes; but when he observed it closely he -found it was a peculiar formation in the rock. - -‘That is one of the secrets,’ said Yacka. ‘It is a guide to the inner -cave we must enter. Watch.’ - -Yacka pushed the bunch of grapes, and a large slab of rock moved slowly -round, and through the opening they saw another large cave beyond. - -‘Enter and wait,’ said Yacka. - -‘Are you coming?’ said Edgar. - -‘I will fetch you,’ said Yacka; ‘but I must enter the White Spirit’s -cave before you, or harm may befall.’ - -‘I don’t half like it,’ said Edgar. ‘We are not afraid, but you had -better go on with us.’ - -Yacka said: ‘You must remain alone.’ - -‘All right,’ said Edgar, sitting down on a projection from the rock; -‘but make haste back.’ - -Yacka went away, and when they looked round they found the rock had -swung back into its place, and they were imprisoned in the cave. - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII. THE WHITE SPIRIT. - - -It was not a pleasant sensation to find themselves alone, shut up in a -cave, only a faint glimmer of light being visible, and from which there -appeared to be no means of escape. There was a peculiar clammy dampness -about the atmosphere, and a strange vault-like smell. It might have -been an old tomb, so weird was everything surrounding them. - -‘The stone must have swung back into its place,’ said Edgar. ‘Yacka -will open it when he returns.’ - -‘All the same, I don’t like it,’ said Will. ‘Suppose he could not move -the stone again. If anything happened to him, we have very little -chance of getting out.’ - -‘There is no occasion for alarm at present,’ said Edgar. ‘I trust -Yacka, and he will soon return. To pass away the time we may as well -examine the cave. It is evidently only one of many. The whole of these -rocks and hills are honeycombed.’ - -They stepped cautiously, and felt the sides of the cave, finding them -smooth and even. - -‘Here is another of these peculiar formations like a bunch of grapes,’ -said Edgar. ‘Perhaps there is another stone that swings round. We can -try at any rate.’ - -He pushed the hard knob, as he had seen Yacka do, and cried out -excitedly: - -‘It moves, Will; come and help me! Push hard! I can feel it giving way.’ - -Slowly the huge stone moved, and there was an opening wide enough for -them to pass through. - -Edgar went through first, but came back quickly when Will called out -the opening was closing up again and the stone swinging back into its -place. Edgar had just time to step back into the cave when the stone -swung to. - -‘That is the way the other must have closed up,’ said Edgar. ‘It made -no noise. Let us have another try, the cave on the other side is much -larger than this.’ - -‘If we get through,’ said Will, ‘the stone will swing back, and we -shall be worse off than before. Yacka will not be able to find us when -he returns.’ - -‘He will follow us,’ said Edgar. ‘He must know of this cave and the way -to enter it.’ - -‘If you mean going on, I will follow you,’ said Will. - -They moved the stone again, and this time they both stepped quickly -through before it swung back. - -The cave they entered was, as Edgar said, much larger than the one they -had just left. It was lighted by the same dim light, but they could not -see from whence it came. - -‘Here is another knob,’ said Will. ‘They must have been made by the -blacks. Perhaps we are on the way to the cave of Enooma. I wonder what -Yacka will think if we reach it before him.’ - -‘He will think we have been guided there by the White Spirit,’ said -Edgar, ‘and will regard us with superstitious awe. It would be a good -thing if we could come across the cave he spoke of without his help.’ - -The stone turned in a similar way to the others, but this time they -found themselves in a long passage, like an old mining tunnel in a rock. - -They walked cautiously along, but there was more light here than in -the cave they had left. Edgar kicked a loose stone and it rolled some -distance in front and then vanished, and they heard a splash. The stone -had fallen into a deep hole, and as they peered down they saw the water -rolling slowly along at a considerable depth. - -‘It must be an underground river,’ said Edgar. ‘We have had a narrow -escape.’ - -They shuddered to think what would have befallen them had they not -been warned by the stone. Round one side of the opening was a narrow -pathway, and along this they passed safely to the opposite side, -looking well ahead in case there should be more of these death traps. - -The passage wound through the rock in a tortuous manner, and after they -had gone a considerable distance, they sat down to rest and wonder -where it would lead them. Will wished they had remained in the cave and -waited for Yacka’s return, and Edgar began to think he had ventured -upon a foolhardy journey. - -‘We are in for it now,’ he said, ‘and shall have to go on, for we -cannot find our way back, and even if we did, we could not push the -stones round from this side. It looks very much like the workings of -an old mine, but there can have been no mining done here, because the -blacks know nothing of such work. What’s that?’ - -They listened intently and heard a faint sound in the distance like -someone in pain and wailing aloud. - -‘Come along,’ said Edgar, ‘there is someone ahead of us.’ - -They walked on as fast as they were able, and presently came to the end -of the passage. Here they found another stone blocking the exit, but it -had been partly pushed aside as though someone had just entered, and it -had not swung back into its place. Edgar passed through, and as he did -so held up his hand to caution Will not to make a noise. - -It was a strange, weird sight they saw. They had entered another -large cave, but it was of a totally different formation to those they -had seen. At the far end of the cave was a beautiful crystal wall -nearly thirty feet high. The stalagmites were short and thick, and the -stalactitic formations extremely long, many being over a hundred feet -in length. Massive deposits could be seen on all sides heaped up in the -most curious manner. Many of them were of a wondrous salmon colour, -others were deep red, and brown, and several glittered with a dull -blood-red glow. - -They were awed by this grand, majestic freak of Nature. To the left -was another passage, full of magnificent columns of stalactites and -stalagmites, all pure white and diamond-like in brilliance; they seemed -to be coated with sparkling and lustrous gems. These columns rose from -floor to roof like huge pillars in some vast cathedral. They were of -different formations, but all about the same height. All the colours -of the rainbow sparkled in the various pillars, and the effect was -dazzling. - -Passing down this magnificent column passage, untouched by the art of -man, and marvelling at its strange beauty, they came to a beautiful -shawl-like formation of the purest white, which hung suspended from the -roof between two massive pillars until it reached within a yard of the -floor. This curtain was of the most delicate pattern, the tracery being -very fine, in some places almost as fine as a spider’s web. There were -designs on it of flowers and leaves unlike any they had ever seen in -reality. It was evident this curtain shut off some chamber beyond from -the passage of columns they had just passed through. - -Edgar was about to speak, when they again heard the wail that had -before startled them. - -This time it sounded nearer, on the other side of the curtain, and -Edgar stooped down in order to pass underneath. Will followed him, and -both clutched their revolvers. - -They were now in a richly-stocked chamber of large size, the colours -on the rock and the roof being of a dazzling white, like alabaster. In -a recess at the end was a white recumbent figure, resting on a huge -salmon-coloured slab, from which hung down like drapery a yellow-tinted -curtain of stone, with red-veined tracery running through it in all -manner of intricate shapes and ways. - -Before this stone figure, resting upon its hard bed, knelt the black -figure of Yacka, standing out with extraordinary distinctness from his -white surroundings. Yacka prostrated himself before the white figure, -and from time to time gave a low, yet piercing, wailing cry. - -They stood looking upon the strange scene in silence, and neither felt -inclined to break it. - -Yacka suddenly seemed to be aware that someone was present, for he rose -to his feet and, turning round, faced them. - -He did not seem at all surprised to see them, and beckoned to them to -advance. - -When they reached the stone upon which Yacka stood, the black said: - -‘Kneel, kneel. This is the White Spirit of the Enooma. This is Enooma, -and this is her cave. She dwells here. She has lived here from the -beginning, and Yacka is her son. Kneel before the White Spirit.’ - -To humour him they knelt. There was something solemn about the -proceedings--something it was difficult to understand. As they knelt, -Yacka wailed again, and the peculiar cry echoed through the white, -vaulted chamber. - -‘I knew you would come,’ said Yacka. ‘Enooma told me you would find -your way. She whispered to me that you were of her race, and her -people.’ The black’s voice had a sad tone in it. ‘She has found her -white sons, and the poor black must know her no more; Yacka is no -longer the only son of Enooma. He has brought you to her, and she -claims you as her own. You are of her race and her people. Rise and -look upon the face of Enooma, the White Spirit, and say did Yacka speak -false when he brought you here.’ - -Edgar and Will rose to their feet, and, standing on a large slab which -Yacka pointed out to them, they looked down upon the figure before them. - -To Edgar it looked like the figure of a very beautiful woman carved in -alabaster. She lay on her back, with her hands hidden beneath the folds -of a fine piece of stone lacework. The lower part of the figure had a -similar covering, so that the actual part of a woman visible to them -was the face only. But the lace covering of the body was of such fine -work that the figure could almost be seen underneath. - -The face of Enooma wore a calm and peaceful expression, such as is -invariably found upon the carved monuments of the dead, and bearing but -little sign of the mind that worked within before death. - -‘Can this be the image of a being that once lived here?’ said Edgar to -Will. - -Yacka stood some distance away, and could not hear them. - -‘Impossible,’ said Will. ‘No white woman has ever been here.’ - -‘It may not have been a white woman,’ said Edgar. ‘Carved as this is, -one could not tell whether the original was black or white. It is an -alabaster figure, or looks like it.’ He touched the figure on the face -with his hand, and drew it back suddenly. ‘It feels quite hot,’ he said. - -‘Probably so intensely cold that you imagined for the moment it burned -you,’ said Will. - -Edgar touched the face again, but, strange to say, could not keep his -hand upon it. - -‘You try,’ he said; and Will put his hand out. - -Yacka saw the motion, and called out: - -‘Touch her not! Only one must touch her.’ - -Will smiled as he said: - -‘I will do her no harm, Yacka.’ - -‘At your own risk,’ said the black, ‘touch her, but do not blame me; I -warned you.’ - -Will put out his hand again, and then a strange thing happened. Before -he touched the face his feet slipped, and he fell off the slab with -such force that, his head coming into violent contact with the stone, -he was stunned. - -Edgar jumped down and held up his head, and in a few moments Will -recovered his senses. - -‘I warned you,’ said Yacka. - -‘It was a pure accident,’ said Will. - -Edgar made no remark, but he thought it a strange coincidence. - -A peculiar rumbling sound was heard, and Yacka listened intently. In -a moment there was a terrific crash. The rock upon which they stood -shook, and the sides of the cave seemed to rock. - -The slab upon which rested the White Spirit of Enooma rocked to and -fro, and the figure seemed to move. - -Crash followed crash, and roar upon roar. The forces of Nature seemed -to have suddenly burst loose, and a general upheaval was taking place. -So violent became the oscillation, that they were compelled to lie down -on the floor of the cave. - -‘It is Enooma’s welcome to her own people,’ said Yacka, who was not in -the least afraid. - -‘It is an earthquake,’ said Edgar in an awestruck voice. - -‘What is an earthquake?’ said Yacka. - -Edgar made no reply. He could not. For the first time he felt a strange -fear creep over him. With a trembling hand he pointed to the white -figure of Enooma. - -They looked with wondering eyes, and on Yacka’s face was an expression -of absolute terror. The slab on which Enooma rested cracked and split, -and the white figure disappeared from view. - -With a terrible cry of rage Yacka sprang to his feet, and looked down -the opening into which the White Spirit of Enooma had disappeared. - - - - -CHAPTER XIX. THE FORCES OF NATURE. - - -As Yacka stood on the height above them, his black figure seemed to -grow and expand until he looked a giant in stature. His rage was -terrible, and his whole frame shook with wrath. Shock followed quickly -upon shock, but Yacka maintained his foothold, despite the violent -concussions that rocked the cave. - -A huge piece of rock crashed down at Edgar’s feet, the broken portions -flying in all directions. They at once looked round for some place to -hide in, and some protection from the falling stones. Crawling along -on their hands and knees, they crept under a portion of the slab upon -which the white figure had rested, and which had fallen upon two large -rocks that upheld it. Under this they had a safe shelter, providing the -ground held firm. Above the roar and din of falling rocks they could -now hear the peals of thunder, which sounded like salvos of artillery. -A crack in the roof of the cavern admitted the lightning, which darted -in and out incessantly. - -From where they were hidden they could see Yacka, who still stood a -solitary black figure amidst this chaos. The black was lost to all -sense of danger, even to the nature of the surroundings. One thought -alone absorbed him--the sudden vanishing of the white figure of Enooma. -He peered into the depths below him, but could see nothing; he waved -his hands wildly, and uttered loud cries. - -Watching him intently, Edgar and Will were afraid every moment he would -jump into the fissure, or be hurled into it by a sudden shock. After -a few moments’ pause in this battle of the forces of Nature, another -shock was felt. They heard the same dull, rumbling sound, and felt the -vibration of the earth beneath them. The movement increased in force, -until they were rocked to and fro, and had to cling to the edge of the -slab for support. Another rush of fallen rocks and stones took place, -and after a terrific and prolonged peal of thunder a dead silence -reigned. After the deafening noise the sudden silence could almost be -felt; the change was marvellous. - -‘It is all over,’ said Edgar. ‘Thank God, we are alive!’ - -They crept out of their hiding-place and looked for Yacka, but he was -nowhere to be seen. Hastily they scrambled on to the fallen slabs, and -looked down into the dark hole where the figure of Enooma had fallen. - -‘Yacka, Yacka!’ shouted Edgar. - -There was no answer, except a loud echo of his voice. Again Edgar -shouted, and this time there was a faint response. - -‘He has fallen down,’ said Will. ‘How are we to reach him? He may be -fatally injured.’ - -They looked round for some means of descending in safety, and after -peering down the hole for some time Edgar said: - -‘There is a light at the bottom, and now I can see better; the rocks -seem to be piled up in heaps. We may be able to descend by slipping -from one to the other. It is our only chance, and we must try it.’ - -They prepared for their perilous descent; they had no rope, and nothing -out of which a support of any kind could be made. - -Edgar knelt down, and Will caught hold of one hand as he glided over -the edge. - -‘All right,’ said Edgar, ‘I have a foothold here.’ - -Will followed, and the same operation was repeated, and Edgar again -found a firm footing lower down. He stood still, and helped Will to -follow him. It was slow work, but by degrees they neared the bottom. - -Edgar looked down from the ledge upon which he was standing, and saw -Yacka lying near the foot of the rock. - -‘Are you badly hurt?’ he called out. - -‘Not much hurt,’ replied Yacka. ‘My leg pains, but is not broken.’ - -‘It is a big drop from here,’ said Edgar, ‘but it does not look a -dangerous place to fall on. I’ll chance it.’ - -He let himself down to his full length, and then dropped. - -‘It is quite safe,’ he shouted to Will. - -Will followed, and they found they were on a bed of moss and ferns that -had flourished in the darkness, and had been kept green by the dampness. - -Yacka was not much hurt. He had slipped, and fallen a considerable -distance, and his descent had been checked by a projection in the rock. -From this he had gradually descended, much in the same way as Will and -Edgar. - -‘Where are we?’ said Edgar. ‘This cavern must have been in its present -state a long time.’ - -‘It has,’ said Yacka. ‘This is the place I was to show you. The White -Spirit of Enooma guarded the entrance. The place where she rested -formed the opening. She fell down here, and is gone; Enooma will be -seen no more. When her treasure is gone there will be no need for her -to guard it. Her task is ended, and she will watch no more.’ - -‘If the figure fell on the moss and ferns it would not be much -injured,’ said Edgar; ‘we will search for Enooma while you rest here.’ - -‘It is not good for Yacka to remain; he will search with you,’ said the -black. - -‘She must be near here,’ said Will. ‘See, there is the opening down -which she fell.’ - -They searched in every direction, but could find no trace of the -figure. Edgar felt they were treading on some soft substance like sand, -and, stooping down, felt it with his hands. It was like powder, quite -white and fine. - -‘The figure must have crumbled away,’ said Edgar. ‘Look at this -powder’; and he handed some to Will. - -Yacka looked at it curiously, and said: - -‘Enooma has gone; the White Spirit has left her cave, and has shown no -sign.’ - -‘This is a sign,’ said Edgar. ‘Your white lady has crumbled to dust. -The figure must have been one of Nature’s freaks, and having become -decayed and rotten with age, has been ground to powder by the fall.’ - -‘I should like to know how the figure came where we found it,’ said -Will. - -‘It was placed there by the Enooma years and years ago,’ said Yacka. -‘It was a pure block of white stone then, and no figure on it. The -White Spirit formed the figure, and Yacka is the son of Enooma.’ - -‘Was Enooma, your mother, a white woman?’ said Edgar. - -‘I knew no mother,’ said Yacka. ‘She left me before I could speak. The -tribe knew she was white, and her spirit lived in these caves. Now the -spirit is gone, and the Enooma will seek a new country. It is good; we -have lived here too long. We shall go north, and be near the sea; that -will give strength to the Enooma, and make them strong big men.’ - -‘How are we to get out of this place,’ said Will. - -‘Easy way out,’ said Yacka; ‘but hard way in.’ - -Edgar thought this strange, but waited to see what Yacka meant. - -‘Come,’ said Yacka, limping along. ‘I will show you the riches of -Enooma.’ - -He led them along a dark passage into another cave, and here the light -streamed in from a cleft in the rock. Gold glittered in heaps on the -floor. There were nuggets of gold almost solid, and some as large as a -goose egg. They were scattered about in reckless profusion. There were -diamonds of small size, uncut, and great rubies of pigeon-blood colour. -It was a cave of riches, and Edgar and Will feasted their eyes on it in -amazement. They held the rubies in their hands, and gloated over their -wondrous colour. They handled the gold and felt its weight, and were -bewildered with the nature of the discovery. - -‘How did all this come here?’ said Edgar. ‘To whom does it belong?’ - -‘It is mine,’ said Yacka. ‘I am the son of Enooma, and the tribe -collected it. None of them know its value. They do not wish for gold -or stones. All they wish for is to live a savage life, and to have a -country of their own. They cannot be taught what such things as these -mean. Yacka has been in great cities and knows. He has seen the white -man kill for love of gold; he has seen the women of the white men sell -themselves for these,’ and he held up some rubies and diamonds. ‘It is -better for the Enooma to remain as they are. Gold would make them fight -amongst themselves, now they fight their enemies.’ - -‘You may be right,’ said Edgar. ‘All the same, I should like a few -samples of your wealth, Yacka.’ - -‘Take what you will,’ said Yacka. ‘It is far to carry it. Do not take -too much, or you will not reach Yanda again. Water is more precious -than gold sometimes.’ - -‘May we return and take away more?’ asked Will. - -‘If you can find the place,’ said the black; ‘but Yacka will show you -no more.’ - -‘Then I am afraid we shall not have much chance,’ said Will. ‘It is a -pity all this wealth should be wasted.’ - -‘Others may find it, and take their share,’ said Yacka. ‘It is not good -for one man to have too much.’ - -‘We can carry enough away with us,’ said Edgar, ‘to give us a start in -life, anyhow. Perhaps Yacka is right. It is not good for a man to have -too much. Will you help us, Yacka?’ - -‘To carry gold for you?’ said the black. - -‘Yes,’ said Edgar. - -‘I will carry some, and stones for you, but I will not use any,’ Yacka -said. - -‘You’re a strange being,’ said Edgar; ‘but the black man lives not as -the white man.’ - -‘No,’ said Yacka; ‘he does not slay his friend for gold.’ - -Edgar dropped the subject. Whatever the cruel, cowardly conduct of the -blacks might be, he knew enough about the pursuit of wealth to refrain -from arguing with Yacka. - -‘The tribe will be waiting for us,’ said Yacka. ‘We must return.’ - -‘Perhaps the earthquake has frightened them away,’ said Will. - -‘They would not feel it so much as we did, being underground,’ said -Edgar. - -‘It was no earthquake,’ said Yacka. ‘It was the White Spirit welcoming -you.’ - -‘A strange welcome,’ said Edgar. - -‘Had it been an earthquake you would have been killed,’ said Yacka. -‘I have seen what an earthquake does. It swallows up mountains and -trees, and heaves up other mountains in their place. All the plains of -Australia were formed by earthquakes, and the mountains were thrown up -to make that part smooth.’ - -‘How long will it take us to return to the tribe?’ said Edgar. - -‘Not long,’ replied Yacka. ‘We will go now. We can return for the gold.’ - -‘We had better take some now,’ said practical Will. - -Edgar was nothing loath, and they filled what pockets they had left in -their torn clothes with gold, rubies, and diamonds. - -Yacka watched them and said: - -‘I will return for more. You need not come again.’ - -‘You mean you do not wish us to return,’ said Edgar. - -‘That is it,’ said Yacka. ‘I will return alone.’ - -To this they agreed, acknowledging that Yacka had the right to do as he -pleased, as it was undoubtedly his find. They were not long in getting -out of this strange labyrinth of caves and passages, and Edgar wondered -why they had not come in this way. Before they reached the exit Yacka -said they must be blindfolded. To this at first they protested, but as -Yacka was firm, and they were in his power, they consented. - -Yacka led Will by the hand, Edgar holding Will’s other hand. They -tramped in this way for a considerable time, and then Yacka removed the -covering from their eyes. - -They were on the grassy plain once more, but the whole scene had been -changed by the wondrous forces of Nature. Huge masses of rock were -strewn about, and trees were felled and torn up by the roots. Where -they had entered the mountains there was no other means of passing -through. The blacks had retreated before the terrible storm, and were -encamped a long way off. They could just see the camp fires in the -distance. Several dead blacks lay around, evidently killed by falling -rocks, but Yacka took very little notice of them. Death ended all for -these men, and, being dead, Yacka thought no more of them. - -When Edgar looked round to see where they had come out of the caves, -there was no opening anywhere. Yacka smiled as he said: - -‘You will never find the entrance. It is known only to me, and once I -lost it and never found it again.’ - -‘Then that is the reason we went in the other way,’ said Edgar. - -‘Yes,’ said Yacka. ‘Now I have the way out, I can find the way in -again.’ - -They marched towards the camp, and the Enooma rushed to meet them, -uttering loud cries of delight. They had never expected to see them -return alive after such a terrific earthquake. These blacks were -strange people. Terrified as they had recently been, they had in a -very few hours forgotten their experiences. The sudden changes in -this climate had made them familiar with the working of the forces of -Nature, which are truly marvellous. - -In the stillness of the night, as Edgar and Will sat side by side, they -returned thanks for their merciful escape. It was an experience they -would never forget, and now that it was over both felt untold gold -would not tempt them to brave it again. - - - - -CHAPTER XX. THE RETURN TO YANDA. - - -Before they were awake next morning Yacka, true to his promise, went to -the cave and returned with some of the finest rubies and purest lumps -of gold. He roused Edgar and Will, and showed them what he had done. - -‘It is as much as we can carry,’ he said, and they agreed with him. - -The gold was heavy, and they had a long tramp before them. - -Without further delay they collected their treasure, and made it secure -in a strong skin loin-cloth, which was fastened by dried strips of -leather, so that none of the stones could fall out. - -‘This is like putting all our eggs in one basket,’ said Edgar. ‘I think -we had better carry the best of the rubies about us.’ - -This was done, and the bag again fastened securely. - -The Enooma accompanied them, and left them about a couple of days’ -journey from the ranges. - -At this point Edgar and Will bade them farewell, and Yacka promised to -return and travel with them further north. The black had explained to -them all that had taken place in the caves, and they did not care to -remain longer in that district. - -Yacka led them safely through the MacDonnell Ranges, and they reached -Alice Springs, where they had a hearty welcome. - -‘We never expected to see you alive again,’ said Walter Hepburn. ‘You -have been away close upon six months, and we thought you were gone for -good. I hope you are satisfied with your experiences.’ - -‘We are,’ said Edgar. ‘We have seen many strange and wonderful sights.’ - -‘You must tell me about your adventures to-night,’ said Hepburn. ‘I -have kept your horses safe, and they will be ready for the journey.’ - -It was a relief to Edgar and Will to obtain fresh clothes, for those -they wore were almost in rags. - -The night of their arrival they related to Walter Hepburn all that had -befallen them, and he was amazed. He could hardly credit the account -Edgar gave of the wealth found in the cave of Enooma; but when he saw -the precious stones and gold spread out before him, he was completely -overwhelmed. - -‘This is pure gold,’ he said, as he handled a large lump of the -precious metal. ‘And these rubies are exceedingly rich in colour, and -worth a heap of money. We have found rubies in the creeks here, but -nothing to be compared to these. Of course, you will return with a -properly equipped expedition, and carry the bulk of it away?’ - -‘I am afraid that will be out of the question,’ said Edgar. ‘Yacka will -not guide us there again, and I am sure we could not find the place.’ - -‘Yacka must be forced to act as guide,’ said Hepburn. ‘Such a treasure -as you have discovered cannot be allowed to remain buried.’ - -‘I shall not be the one to use force against Yacka,’ said Edgar. ‘The -black has acted honestly by us, and we must do the same by him.’ - -‘If you fellows do not have another try to find the place I shall,’ -said Hepburn. - -Edgar laughed as he said: - -‘You are welcome to do so. For my part I have had enough of it, and am -glad to have got back again with a whole skin.’ - -‘You must be careful not to let anyone know about here what you have -with you. There are some desperate characters, and a mere hint as to -the wealth you have, and your lives would not be safe,’ said Hepburn. - -‘We have told no one but yourself,’ said Edgar; ‘and we know we can -trust you. You are an old Redbank boy.’ - -After some persuasion Walter Hepburn agreed to accept a couple of fine -rubies and a heavy nugget in return for the keep of the horses, and as -a remembrance of their visit. As well as he was able Edgar described -the country they had traversed and the appearance of the place where -the caves were. - -‘Even if you reach there safely,’ said Edgar, ‘you will not be able to -find the entrance. We could see nothing of it, and even Yacka lost the -run of it once.’ - -‘It is worth the risk,’ said Hepburn. ‘I wish I had gone with you. I am -used to these wilds, and once I had been over the ground I am sure I -could find my way back.’ - -They did not remain long at Alice Springs, as they were eager to return -to Yanda and learn how their friends had got on during their absence. - -The return journey passed in much the same way as their ride to Alice -Springs from Yanda. - -They had a plentiful supply of ammunition, which Walter Hepburn had -given them, and consequently were not afraid to shoot when in need of -provisions. - -Edgar noticed Yacka was restless, and did not seem at his ease during -their journey, and he questioned him as to the reason. - -‘I have a fear we are being followed,’ said Yacka. ‘I have seen no one, -but still I fear it. Did anyone know you had gold and stones at Alice -Springs?’ - -‘Only Walter Hepburn,’ said Edgar. ‘We were careful not to tell anyone -else.’ - -‘You showed him the stones?’ asked Yacka. - -‘Yes,’ said Edgar; ‘we spread them out on the table in his house, but -no one else was there.’ - -‘But there are windows,’ said Yacka, ‘and someone may have looked in. -It was foolish.’ - -‘I think you are wrong about anyone following us,’ said Will. ‘They -would have attacked us before now.’ - -Yacka explained that he had not slept at night since they left the -Springs. He had watched and waited and heard strange sounds. He felt -sure they were being followed, but at some distance. - -‘You must have a sleep to-night, anyhow,’ said Edgar, ‘or you will -knock up. We can keep watch in turns.’ - -Yacka assented, for he felt much in need of sleep. - -They camped on a level patch of ground, where there was not much -surrounding shelter, and where they felt secure against any surprise. - -Worn out from want of sleep, Yacka stretched himself on the ground, and -quickly fell into a deep slumber. - -‘He’s dead tired,’ said Edgar. ‘I have never seen him drop off into -such a sound sleep. He generally has an eye open, and his ears catch -every sound.’ - -‘Are you going to take first watch?’ said Will. - -‘If you like,’ said Edgar. ‘I will rouse you when I become drowsy.’ - -Will soon followed Yacka into the land of dreams, and Edgar, leaning -his back against the trunk of a tree, watched them. The treasure was -close to him, and the sight of it brought back to him the scenes -they had witnessed. From these experiences his thoughts wandered to -Wal Jessop and Eva, and he wondered how they had gone on during his -absence. He was anxious to see them again, and when he reached Yanda -meant to take a trip to Sydney as early as possible. - -Then he thought of home, and his father and sister, and hoped to have -letters from them at Yanda. They would be anxious to hear how his -exploit had turned out, and what a glowing account he would give them! -Lost in these pleasant reflections, he did not hear the stealthy tread -of two men behind the tree. - -These men kept well in the shadow of the trunk of the tree against -which Edgar sat, all unconscious of their approach. They were -desperate-looking fellows, dressed in bush fashion, and had evidently -ridden after Edgar and his companions from Alice Springs. Cautiously -they approached, avoiding the loose twigs on the ground, and halting -to listen intently at every few yards. Each man had a revolver in his -hand, and a knife in his belt. - -The taller of the two motioned to the knife at his side, and pointed -to Edgar. The other nodded, and drew out his formidable blade. He then -crept, knife in hand, towards Edgar, and his companion made towards -Will. - -Edgar, who began to feel drowsy, rose to his feet and leaned on his -shoulder against the tree, his back still to the man stealing up, knife -in hand. Edgar little knew the peril he was in, and dreaded nothing. - -Nearer and nearer drew the man with his murderous weapon. He was now -close to the tree, and had his knife uplifted ready to strike. - -Suddenly a laughing jackass, perched in the branches above Edgar’s -head, gave his mocking laugh. The sound startled him, and he turned -round; as he did so he saw the man, and the knife he had in his -uplifted hand flashed in the faint moonlight. - -He shouted, ‘Yacka! Yacka! Will! Will!’ and sprang backwards. - -The man rushed upon him just as Will opened his eyes in a half-drowsy -way, and dimly realized that a man was pointing his revolver at him. - -‘Move, and I fire!’ said the man to Yacka, as he saw the black spring -to his feet. - -Yacka dared not move; he knew it would be instant death to Will. - -Meanwhile Edgar grappled with his assailant, and a desperate struggle -was going on. - -The man covering Will called out to his mate and Edgar: - -‘Drop struggling, or I fire!’ - -Edgar glanced at him, and saw the danger Will was in. - -‘Hands off!’ he said, and the man ceased to struggle with him. - -Unfortunately, neither Edgar or Will had their revolvers handy, and -their guns were against the trunk of the tree--the revolvers being -luckily hidden from sight in the long rank grass. - -‘We want that bag,’ said the tall man, still covering Will. ‘Let my -mate get the bag and your guns, and then you can go.’ - -In a moment it flashed across Edgar that if the men took the bag and -the guns there would still be the revolvers, and that gave them a -chance before the thieves reached their horses. He was not, however, -too eager, and said: - -‘You are a cowardly pair to rob us like this.’ - -‘You are three to one,’ said the man with a grin. ‘Nothing very -cowardly about that. Will you “ante up” the “boodle”?’ - -‘How do we know you will not fire on us? We shall be unarmed,’ said -Edgar. - -‘We want the plunder, not your lives,’ said the man. ‘Come, be quick. -We have no time to waste.’ - -The man was evidently impatient, and Edgar thought: ‘Perhaps they are -afraid of someone following them from the Springs.’ Aloud he said: - -‘We agree. Take the bag and our guns and go.’ - -The man who had attacked Edgar picked up the bag and the two guns. It -was an anxious moment for Edgar. The revolvers were lying near the -tree, and the man might kick them as he went along. With a sigh of -relief, Edgar saw the man had not discovered them. Yacka was on the -alert, but saw no chance of making a move without injuring Will, and -Edgar was in the same fix. The tall man ‘bailed’ them up until his -companion returned with their horses. - -Having fixed the bag firmly in front of the saddle the man mounted, -placing the guns also in front of him. He then led the other horse up -to the man covering Will, and levelled his revolver at him while his -mate mounted. - -Yacka stood at the other side of the horses, and for a brief moment the -man covering Will could not see him, and the taller man was mounting -with his back to Yacka. In an instant Yacka bounded between the man -with the revolver and Will, and jerked the horse’s bridle, which caused -the animal to suddenly back. The man fired, but the movement of the -horse spoilt his aim and the shot did no harm. - -Seeing how matters stood, Edgar ran for the revolvers, and reached them -before the thieves could realize what had happened. - -A desperate fight now took place. The mounted men, whose horses plunged -at the sound of firing, aimed at Will and Edgar, and the former felt a -sharp pain in his left arm. - -Yacka still hung on to the horse’s bridle, and the man on it fired -point-blank at him, the bullet grazing his head. - -Edgar approached this man, and when close to him fired. The shot told, -and the man’s right arm fell to his side, his revolver dropping on to -the ground. - -‘Winged!’ shouted Edgar. ‘Hold on, Yacka!’ - -But Yacka had let go of the horse and pulled the man out of the saddle. -The horse, finding itself free, galloped off, with the bag still fast -to the front of the saddle. - -The other man, seeing how matters were going, and knowing the loose -horse had the bag still fast to the saddle, turned tail and galloped -after it. - -‘The horses--the horses! Quick, Will!’ said Edgar. ‘We must be after -them.’ - -Will brought up the horses, and they were quickly in the saddle. - -‘You keep guard over this fellow, Yacka,’ said Edgar. ‘Don’t let him -go.’ - -For answer Yacka smiled savagely, and gripped the man by the throat so -hard that his eyes started from his head. - -‘He’s in safe hands,’ said Edgar. ‘Come along, Will, or we shall lose -our treasure after all.’ - -They rode away after the other man and the runaway horse as fast as -their nags could carry them. - - - - -CHAPTER XXI. AN EXCITING CHASE. - - -It proved an exciting chase they had commenced. The thief knew he -need expect no mercy if caught, and rode desperately. He knew the -country better than Edgar and Will, which gave him a decided advantage; -moreover, he had a good horse, probably stolen, and knew how to ride. - -‘He is gaining on us,’ said Edgar. ‘I am afraid we shall lose him. -There is no chance of hitting either man or horse from this distance.’ - -Mile after mile was traversed, and still the chase went on. The -riderless horse stuck close to his companion, but when he began to flag -the man took hold of the bridle and urged him on. Edgar took no heed -where they were going, nor did Will. They were too excited to take much -notice of the country they passed through. At last the fugitive turned -his horse to the left, and plunged into a much more difficult country -to travel. The undergrowth became denser and tangled, and it was with -difficulty the horses could be forced to go through it. It was not long -before they lost sight of the man they were in pursuit of. - -‘Where can he have got to?’ said Will. ‘He would never hide here with -two of us after him.’ - -‘We must ride on,’ replied Edgar. ‘It is easy to miss a man and come -across his track again in a very short time.’ - -They rode on at a slow pace, and presently came to a narrow opening -in the scrub. Here they halted and found recent tracks of horses, so -they determined to follow in this direction. The tracks led them in a -roundabout way, and presently they came to the conclusion the man had -doubled back. - -‘He must be heading for our camp again,’ said Edgar. ‘Strange he should -do this unless he fancies we are put off the scent, and he is riding -back to rescue his mate.’ - -‘If that is his game,’ said Will, ‘we must follow him hard. He might -shoot Yacka before we arrive.’ - -It was, however, difficult for them to find their way. They were not -experienced bushmen, and had failed to notice certain signs by which -they would know they were on the right track. They saw no signs of -the man, nor could they now observe in which direction the horses had -gone. To ride on and trust to chance was their only hope. It was quite -light now, and this aided them. As time passed they became anxious, -and wondered what would become of Yacka if they did not arrive on the -scene in time, for they had not the least doubt now that their man was -heading for the camp to rescue his mate. - -‘This chase he has led us has been a blind,’ said Edgar. ‘If we had -taken ordinary precautions we ought to have found out he was doubling -back.’ - -‘Only a bushman would have found that out,’ said Will. ‘I do not see -how we can blame ourselves.’ - -‘We have had enough experience the last few months to have found that -out,’ said Edgar. ‘By Jove! there he is, I believe.’ - -There was a horseman in front of them, but they could not see the -second horse. They rode on faster now, but did not gain much ground. A -rise in the land hid the man from view, and soon after he disappeared -they heard a shot. This made them ride all the faster, and they -quickly reached the top of the rise, and had a good view of the plain -beyond. - -‘He fired that shot to warn his mate,’ said Will. ‘We cannot be far -from the camp now.’ - -‘I’ll fire,’ said Edgar; ‘and if Yacka hears the two shots he will -probably divine we are in pursuit.’ - -He fired a shot from his revolver as they rode on. - -‘There’s the place we camped at,’ said Edgar, pointing to two or three -tall trees: ‘but I see nothing of Yacka or the other men.’ - -They rode up to the place, and found the camp deserted. There was blood -upon the ground and signs of a struggle, but they imagined this must -have been caused by Yacka dragging the wounded man along. Edgar called -out ‘Yacka!’ and gave a loud ‘cooee,’ and after waiting a few moments -they heard a faint response. They rode in the direction of the sound, -and, rounding a clump of trees on a mound, came upon a strange sight. - -Stretched on the ground was one of the robbers, the man they supposed -they had left with Yacka. This man had been strangled, and was dead. -Near him sat Yacka with a strange expression on his face. When the -black saw them he gave a faint moan, and pressed his hand to his side. - -‘Good God! he’s shot!’ said Edgar, dismounting and running to the -black. He found blood streaming from a deep wound in his side evidently -inflicted with a knife. ‘How did this happen?’ asked Edgar, as he -endeavoured to stanch the flow of blood with a neckerchief he had -rapidly pulled off. - -Yacka pointed to the dead man, and Will, who had come up, exclaimed: - -‘This is not the fellow we left with Yacka. It is the man we have been -chasing all this time.’ - -‘Where is the other man?’ asked Edgar, who could hardly believe his -eyes. - -‘I killed him,’ said Yacka faintly. - -‘Where is he?’ asked Will. - -Yacka pointed to some bushes, and Will went across and found the body -of the man they had left with Yacka. This man had also been strangled. - -They managed to stop the flow of blood from the deep wound in Yacka’s -side, but it was some hours before he had sufficiently recovered -strength to relate what had happened. - -When Yacka heard the shot fired, he at once thought the man’s mate had -doubled back to rescue him, and had given Edgar and Will the slip. He -knew how easily it could be done by an old hand, and his surmise was -confirmed by the expression on the man’s face when he heard the shot. -In a moment Yacka had made up his mind how to act. He had no gun, for -he found that all three had been taken, instead of only those belonging -to Edgar and Will. He seized his prisoner by the throat, and strangled -him. Then he propped the dead man up with his back to a tree, and tied -him to it with one of the tethering ropes. He hid himself behind the -tree and waited, and in a short time the other robber came on to the -scene. When this man saw his mate bound to the tree, he dismounted and -came towards him, evidently thinking Yacka had made him fast, that he -had fallen asleep, and Yacka had gone away. - -Yacka awaited his coming, crouching down behind the tree. No sooner did -the man see his mate was dead than he realized that a trap had been set -for him, and ran back to the horses. Yacka was quickly after him, and -before the man could reach the horses had caught him up. Finding Yacka -at such close quarters, the man drew his knife instead of his revolver, -no doubt thinking it would be more effective. A desperate struggle -ensued, which Yacka described graphically. - -‘We rolled over and over,’ said Yacka. ‘I had no knife, and he was a -powerful man. I caught him by the throat, and he lost the grip of his -knife. I clung to him with both hands, and he managed to get his knife -and stuck it in my side. I did not let go my hold. I became fainter and -fainter, but clung to his throat. Then I fell across him, and when I -came to my senses again, which could not have been long, he was dead. -It was their lives or mine, and they were not fit to live.’ - -As they listened to Yacka’s story of this terrible struggle and awful -end of the thieves, they wondered if many men would have had the -courage to act as he had done. - -‘The horses will not have gone far,’ said Yacka. ‘They were dead -tired, I could see, when the man dismounted.’ - -While Will attended to Yacka, Edgar went in search of the two stray -horses, and found them about a couple of miles away, quietly cropping -the scanty herbage. He secured them without trouble, and was glad to -see their precious treasure was safe, and also their guns. - -They had to remain in this spot for a week before Yacka was fit to be -removed, and during that time they buried the bodies of the robbers as -well as they were able with the primitive means at hand. - -Their progress was slow, because Yacka could not ride far, and had to -be helped off one of the horses at different times to rest. It was -lucky for them they had the two captured horses in addition to their -own. Yacka guided them, and seemed to take a delight in hiding from -them how far they were from Yanda. - -‘Surely we must be somewhere near Yanda by this time,’ said Edgar. ‘I -almost fancy I can recognise the country.’ - -‘You ought to,’ said Yacka, ‘for we are on Yanda Station now, and we -shall reach the homestead to-night.’ - -They could not suppress their feelings, and gave a loud hurrah. - -Yacka had spoken correctly, for towards sundown the familiar homestead -came in sight. - -Yacka wished them to gallop on and leave him, but this they declined to -do, saying he had done so much for them, it was only making a small -return to remain with him. - -As they neared the homestead they noticed several figures moving about, -evidently in an excited way, on the veranda. - -‘There’s Ben Brody!’ said Edgar eagerly. ‘He has recognised us. What a -time we shall have to-night!’ - -Ben Brody was standing leaning against the door-post when he saw -something moving across the plain in front of him. He went inside for -his glasses, and, after looking through them for several minutes, he -gave a loud shout. - -It was such an unusual thing for Ben Brody to shout, except when -issuing orders, or expressing his feelings to some unfortunate -new-chum, that the hands about the place fancied the homestead must -have caught fire. Several of them rushed round to the front, and found -Ben Brody executing a kind of war-dance on the veranda. - -‘What’s up now?’ asked Will Henton. ‘Something stinging you?’ - -‘No, you fool,’ roared Brody. ‘Do you think I’m as tender as you? It’s -them lads coming back!’ - -‘Not Foster and Brown?’ asked Will. - -‘That’s just it, you bet,’ said Brody. - -Off ran Will Henton, and in a few moments Harry Noke, Jim Lee, and two -or three more came round. - -‘Give me the glasses,’ said Noke. - -‘No need for that,’ said Jim Lee. ‘I can spot ’em from here.’ - -‘We must go and meet them,’ said Will Henton. - -‘Right you are,’ said Brody. ‘Boys, we’ll have a terrible night of it.’ - -They mounted their horses, and in less time than it takes to write it -down were galloping towards the home-comers. - -The scene was one to be remembered. They sprang from their horses, -and pulled Edgar and Will out of their saddles, and shook them by the -hands, cheered and hallooed until the plain rang with their hearty -shouts. Yacka stood quietly looking on, and when they had almost wrung -Edgar’s and Will’s hands off they tackled him. - -‘Don’t handle Yacka as roughly as you have handled us,’ laughed Edgar; -‘he’s got a bad wound.’ - -Then came a string of questions as to how Yacka received his wound, and -who had given it him. Such a rain of questions was showered at them -that at last Ben Brody said: - -‘Give them breathing-time, lads. We shall hear all about their -adventures later on. We’re right glad to see you back again safe and -sound.’ - -A general chorus of assent followed this remark. - -‘Expect you have not come back loaded with wealth?’ said Will Henton. - -‘Wait and see,’ said Edgar. ‘I rather fancy we have a surprise in store -for you.’ - -‘Have you had a good time?’ said Ben Brody. - -‘It has been a wonderful time, and we have seen many strange things, -and gone through a good deal of hard work. I’m heartily glad to see -Yanda again, but I would not have missed our experiences for the world.’ - -‘Same here,’ said Will Brown, ‘but I never wish to go through such a -time again.’ - -Yacka rode quietly behind, a lonely black figure, the pain in his face -showing how he still suffered. He was glad to see this hearty welcome, -but it made him feel lonely. He had no friends such as these men at -Yanda were. He was a wanderer, an outcast, a black, a despised native -of the country these white men had taken from his people. But Yacka -was, through all this, white enough at heart to know it was all for -the best. His people could never become like these people, and the -country in the hands of blacks, he knew, would still have been wild and -desolate. - - - - -CHAPTER XXII. TIME FLIES. - - -The hands at Yanda marvelled greatly at the tale Edgar told of their -adventures, and they marvelled still more when the treasure they -brought with them was shown. - -‘And to think that black fellow knew all about it, and kept the secret -so long,’ said Ben Brody. ‘I can hardly believe it is true. You must -have travelled thousands of miles. All I can say is you deserve what -you have got.’ - -After staying a few weeks at Yanda, where he received letters from -home, and from Wal Jessop, Edgar decided to go to Sydney and see Eva -again. Will Brown remained at Yanda, in order to gain more experience -of station life. - -When Edgar arrived in Sydney, he at once went to Watson’s Bay. Wal -Jessop did not know Edgar had left Yanda. Eva had constantly inquired -for Edgar during his absence, and been comforted by the assurance he -would return to her. - -Edgar walked up the steep path to the cottage, intending to give -the inmates a surprise, but Eva, who was looking out of the window, -recognised him, and gave a joyful cry that brought Mrs. Jessop to her. -Together they rushed out to greet Edgar, and he soon had little Eva -crowing delightedly in his arms, Mrs. Jessop looking on, her motherly -face beaming with satisfaction. - -‘How you have grown, Eva!’ said Edgar, holding her up in his arms to -have a better look at her. ‘You have had a good home, and Mrs. Jessop -has taken great care of you.’ - -Eva began to prattle in her pretty childish way, and asked Edgar -numerous questions, some of which he found a difficulty in answering. - -When Wal Jessop returned home and found Edgar installed in the cottage -he was delighted. He had been longing to see him again, and to hear -all about his adventures. These Edgar had to relate over and over -again, and little Eva, too, was interested in hearing about Yacka and -the blacks, and the White Spirit in the wonderful cave. When she saw -the precious stones and gold Edgar brought with him, she clapped her -hands with joy, and wanted to play with all the pretty things. - -‘You’ll not be short of money for a time with such rubies as these to -sell,’ said Wal Jessop, as he took some of the stones in his hand. -‘They are the finest I ever saw. You’ll get more for them in London -than you will here.’ - -‘I shall keep the bulk of them,’ said Edgar; ‘but we must dispose of -some of them, Wal, in order to keep things going.’ - -‘Captain Fife will be able to do that for you,’ said Wal. ‘He knows the -best market for such things. What a wonderful chap that black must be! -There are not many like him here.’ - -‘You will see him before long,’ said Edgar. ‘He has promised to come to -Sydney when his wound has quite healed.’ - -‘A knife-thrust like that will take some time to get well,’ said Wal. -‘I wonder if he will ever take you back again to find more of the -treasure?’ - -‘I shall not go,’ said Edgar; ‘but I have no doubt there will be search -made for it, even if Yacka declines to lead the way.’ - -The evening of Edgar’s arrival at the cottage he had a walk on the -cliffs with Wal Jessop, and again looked down upon the terrible rocks -where the _Distant Shore_ was dashed to pieces, and himself and Eva -were so miraculously saved. As he looked into the depths below, the -scene came vividly to mind again, and he could not resist grasping Wal -Jessop by the hand, while the tears stood in his eyes. - -Wal Jessop knew what he meant better than if he had spoken, and -returned the pressure of his hand. They walked back to the cottage, and -once more talked over the scenes of that awful night. - -When Edgar saw Captain Fife that gentleman received him cordially, and -promised to dispose of some of the rubies to the best advantage. - -‘They are wonderfully good stones,’ said Captain Fife, ‘and there will -be no difficulty in obtaining a stiff price for them. By the way, -what are you going to do with yourself now? Are you returning to the -station, or would you prefer to remain in Sydney?’ - -‘If I can obtain a suitable billet,’ said Edgar, ‘I should like to -remain here.’ - -Captain Fife had been on the look-out for a private secretary for some -time, and he offered Edgar the post, which he willingly accepted, -thinking himself fortunate, as indeed he was, to gain such a position. - -Time flies quickly, and when Edgar Foster had been private secretary to -Captain Fife for over two years, he had become quite at home in Sydney, -and was recognised as one of the best of good fellows. Edgar was fond -of sports of all kinds, and he liked fun as well as any young fellow -of his age, but he shunned the fast sets in the city, and one of his -constant companions was Wal Jessop. Two or three times a week he went -to Wal’s cottage to see Eva, who was rapidly growing into a very pretty -girl. He heard regularly from home, and also had news from Yanda--for -Will Brown was still there. Yacka had tried Sydney life, but quickly -tired of it, and returned to the West. - -Two or three expeditions had been fitted out to try and find the Cave -of Enooma, as it was called, for the adventures of Edgar Foster and -Will Brown had been related in the _Sydney Mail_, and naturally there -was a desire to obtain the wealth stated to be there. These expeditions -had, however, been failures, and nothing came of them. Yacka refused -to lead anyone into the Enooma country, and Edgar and Will, when -approached upon the subject, expressed their inability to do so. When -the second expedition failed in its object, people said the discovery -was a myth, but others knew better, and Edgar only smiled when he heard -disparaging remarks made. - -Although Edgar stuck well to his work during the time he had been with -Captain Fife, he found ample opportunity to indulge in his favourite -pastime, cricket, and, much to his delight, had been selected captain -of the South Sydney team. In this capacity he not only proved himself -a good all-round cricketer, but a splendid leader, and no one, it was -generally acknowledged, placed his men to more advantage in the field. -He was selected to play for New South Wales against Victoria, but, like -many a good cricketer before him, he failed at his first attempt. There -was, however, no doubt about his ability, and he now stood an excellent -chance of being selected as one of the next Australian eleven. This is -the height of every cricketer’s ambition in the colonies, and Edgar -felt anxious as to whether his performances during the season would -warrant the selection committee including him in the team. So far he -had done fairly well. There remained one inter-Colonial match to play -against South Australia, and Edgar knew upon this match would depend -the final decision as to his being a member of the Australian eleven. - -He had practised steadily, and felt confident, and was encouraged -by Wal Jessop and Captain Fife. Will Brown wrote from Yanda, saying -they were coming down in force to see him play, and Ben Brody added -a postscript to the effect that the honour of the Yanda boys was in -Edgar’s hands. - -When the eventful day arrived Edgar’s feelings can be imagined. The -match took place on the Association ground at Sydney, and the South -Australians placed a formidable team on the field. Several men on -either side were on their best mettle and playing for a place in the -Australian eleven. - -Ben Brody appeared on the ground resplendent in a new cabbage-tree -hat, which he had bought in honour of the occasion. He was as anxious -as anyone to see Edgar successful. Will Brown vowed if Edgar Foster -went home with the team, he should go by the same boat. Will Henton, -Harry Noke, and Jim Lee all came up from Yanda for the match, and -consequently there was a family party on the ground. In Wal Jessop Ben -Brody found a man after his own heart, and they got on well together. - -Edgar felt encouraged by their presence to do his best, and something -seemed to tell him he would succeed. - -The New South Wales captain won the toss and elected to bat. This gave -Edgar a chance to sit and chat with his friends. He hardly knew how -popular he had become in Sydney, owing to his numerous adventures and -his sterling character, until he saw the number of people who were only -too proud to recognise him. - -‘You must be a favourite with the ladies,’ said Ben Brody. ‘All the -pretty girls are smiling at you. Lucky dog!’ - -It was true Edgar knew several nice girls, but he had not yet found one -he preferred to any of the others. He thought there was time enough for -that in another five or six years. - -The home team commenced badly, and lost two wickets for thirty runs. At -the fall of the fourth wicket Edgar Foster went in, and his appearance -on the ground, from the pavilion, was the signal for a loud outburst -of applause. As he walked to the crease Edgar vowed he would do his -utmost to merit this reception. He was cool and collected, and had -seldom felt so confident. He commenced well by making a couple of -boundary hits in his first over. His partner, Frank Highdale, was well -set, and the pair looked like making a big stand. - -Edgar roused the spectators by hitting a ball into the pavilion, and -Highdale had completely mastered the bowling. Runs came rapidly, and -the South Australian captain seemed puzzled to know how to effect a -separation. - -Although Highdale had been batting some time before Edgar came in, the -latter was first to reach the coveted fifty. When this number of runs -appeared to Edgar’s name on the scoring-board, Ben Brody, to use his -own expression, ‘broke loose.’ He cheered in the most frantic manner, -and waved his huge hat in delight. - -The New South Wales eleven were at the wickets all day, and when stumps -were drawn Edgar Foster was ‘not out, one hundred and nine’! He was -congratulated on all sides, and Captain Fife said, as he shook hands -with him: - -‘Your place in the team is assured. I shall cable to your father as -soon as the selection is made. He will be mighty proud of his son.’ - -On the renewal of the match next day, Edgar added another fifty to his -score, and was clean bowled, after making one hundred and fifty-nine, a -magnificent innings. - -The match ended in a win for the home colony by two hundred runs. In -the second innings Edgar Foster placed fifty-six to his credit; he also -bowled well during the match, and came out with a very good average. - -Consequently, it was no surprise when he found his name amongst the -favoured thirteen cricketers picked to make up the Australian team. He -received a cablegram from his father congratulating him, and this gave -him more pleasure than anything else. - -As usual, there was some grumbling about the composition of the team, -but no one had anything to say about Edgar Foster’s inclusion. - -‘We are to go home in the _Cuzco_,’ said Edgar to Will Brown; ‘so you -had better book your passage.’ - -‘You bet!’ said Will; ‘and who do you think is going home for a trip -with us?’ - -‘Don’t know,’ said Edgar. ‘I wish we could take Yacka. He would create -a sensation there.’ - -‘Yacka is far happier camping out at Yanda,’ said Will. ‘Ben Brody is -going home with us. He says he has never had a holiday since he was a -lad, over forty years ago, and he thinks it is about time he took one -now.’ - -‘I am glad,’ said Edgar. ‘Ben Brody is a real good sort; he’s a rough -diamond, but I like him better than if he were polished.’ - -The hands on Yanda were in high glee about Ben leaving them for a -time. They fancied the mutton diet would be knocked off, but Ben said -he should leave strict injunctions behind about that. - -The time passed quickly, and the morning the _Cuzco_ was to leave -Circular Quay a large crowd of people assembled to see the New -South Wales members of the team leave for London. There was so much -hand-shaking, and so many parting good-byes, that Edgar felt sure some -of them would be left behind. - -Wal Jessop and his wife brought Eva down to see Edgar off, and the -child did not like to see him leave her in the big steamer. - -‘I will come back for you, Eva,’ said Edgar; ‘I promise you I will come -back. Be a good girl while I am away, and I will bring you back the -best doll I can find in London.’ - -‘With brown hair, and blue eyes?’ said Eva. - -‘Yes,’ said Edgar. ‘It shall have bonny blue eyes, and bright brown -hair like yours, Eva.’ - -He took her in his arms, and kissed her over and over again, and then -handed her to Mrs. Jessop. Just as the gangway was about to be raised -they saw a tall figure flying up it with long strides. It was Ben Brody. - -‘You nearly missed us,’ said Edgar, laughing. ‘Where have you been? I -thought I saw you on board some time back.’ - -‘So I was,’ said Ben, gasping for breath; ‘but I left my ‘bacca behind -in a box at the hotel, and I’d sooner have gone back to Yanda than -been on board without my usual brand.’ - -The _Cuzco_ had now cast off, and as she left the wharf Edgar singled -out Eva, hoisted high on Wal Jessop’s shoulder, and waved her a hearty -farewell. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIII. AN EVENTFUL NIGHT. - - -An Australian team bound for England always has a good time on board -the steamer, and the eleven of which Edgar was a member was no -exception to the rule. At Melbourne and Adelaide they were joined by -the members of the team hailing from Victoria and South Australia. - -On arriving at Colombo they went ashore to play a match against a team -selected from the leading local cricketers. Being out of practice -they did not play up to their usual form, and the Colombo team nearly -defeated them, and were much elated in consequence. - -At this time the mail steamers did not pass through the Suez Canal at -night-time, and the _Cuzco_ anchored off Ismailia. A run ashore to pass -away the time was only natural, and Edgar, accompanied by Will Brown -and other members of the team, made up a party. This night ashore at -Ismailia was destined to effect a change in Edgar’s future life. - -The population of Ismailia is a mixture of different nationalities, -some of them being of a rather desperate and fierce nature. An Egyptian -wedding-party passed through one of the streets; it was a curious sight -to unaccustomed eyes. The men, swathed in long white garments, with -turbans on their heads, and sandals on their feet, carried long poles, -at the ends of which lanterns were fixed. Their brown arms and faces -shone in the reflected light, and offered a strong contrast to the -colour of their garments. Fierce eyes gleamed from under dark, bushy -eyebrows, and as the men marched, uttering a wild chant in peculiar -tones, the effect was somewhat weird. The bridegroom, who was being -escorted to his bride, was a tall, powerful young fellow, of a better -caste than his friends. - -All went well until the procession approached the bride’s house, when -a party of young fellows from the _Cuzco_, who had been revelling not -wisely but too well, barred the road. It was a foolhardy thing to do. -To stop such a procession was exceedingly dangerous, and could only be -construed as an insult by the natives, who are not slow to avenge any -slight put upon them. - -Edgar and those with him saw the danger, and shouted to the -obstructionists to move out of the way. It was, however, too late, -and the warning would probably not have been heeded in any case. -Seeing how matters stood, the Egyptians grew furious. Knives flashed -in the light, and a rush was made at the foolish young fellows, who so -recklessly hindered the procession. - -‘Come on,’ shouted Edgar, ‘or there will be murder done!’ - -He rushed forward, followed by his companions, but they found it -impossible to render much assistance, owing to the confusion. Edgar -became separated from the others, and was drawing back from the crowd, -when he heard a cry for help, followed by a woman’s shriek. - -Rushing in the direction of the sound, he saw a girl of about eighteen -struggling in the grasp of a powerful Egyptian. He recognised her -as Miss Muriel Wylde, a passenger on the _Cuzco_, with whom he had -had pleasant chats on deck. In a moment Edgar had the ruffian by the -throat, and forced him to loose his hold. No sooner, however, was the -girl free, than another man seized her and attempted to carry her off. -She struggled violently, and shouted again for help. Edgar had his work -cut out with the man he first tackled. He was unarmed, and had to rely -upon his fists. The furious Egyptian rushed upon him with an uplifted -knife in his hand. Edgar did not flinch, but caught the fellow by the -wrist, and the knife flew from his grasp. Then, with his left fist, he -dealt the man a savage blow between the eyes that well-nigh stunned him. - -Turning to see what had become of Miss Wylde, Edgar saw that she -had fainted, and her captor was hurrying away with her. Edgar gave -chase, and quickly came up with him. The Egyptian dropped his burden, -and turned on Edgar, aiming a terrific blow at him with his knife. -Edgar sprang backwards, and the man over-reached himself. Before he -recovered, Edgar had him on the ground, and stunned him by knocking his -head on the hard road. - -He then sprang to his feet, and went to the assistance of Miss Wylde, -who had luckily been thrown on the soft sand by the side of the road, -and found she had recovered from her faint. - -‘Can you walk?’ said Edgar; ‘are you much hurt?’ - -She was trembling and alarmed, and could hardly answer him. - -‘We must make our way to the quay,’ he said, ‘and get a boat back to -the ship as quickly as possible. These fellows are frantic at being -interfered with, and are in a dangerous state. Lean on me, and try and -walk.’ - -She put her hand on his shoulder, and Edgar supported her by placing -his arm round her waist. - -They had not gone many yards before Edgar heard loud shouting behind -them. It was evident some of the Egyptians were coming that way, and -they must be avoided if possible. A few paces straight ahead Edgar saw -a high wall, and what looked like a doorway. He lifted his companion -off her feet, and ran as fast as he could towards the archway. - -On reaching it he knocked loudly. The door was opened by an old native -woman, who peered curiously into his face. - -Without saying a word Edgar stepped inside, and closed the door behind -him. - -‘What do you here?’ asked the old woman, in broken English. ‘Are you -from the ship?’ - -‘Yes,’ said Edgar, not knowing what else to say, or what excuse to give -for his conduct. - -The old woman’s eyes gleamed, and her wrinkled, parchment-like skin -seemed to crumple up and almost crack. Her mouth expanded in what she -no doubt meant for a smile, but Edgar thought it a diabolical grin, and -Muriel Wylde shrank back. - -‘Money--gold!’ said the woman hoarsely, her skinny hands extended like -a couple of claws. ‘Gold, and you shall hear your fortune. The oldest -Egyptian in Ismailia can speak truth.’ - -Edgar felt relieved; had the old woman guessed they were fugitives she -might not have been so friendly. He looked at his companion, and said: - -‘We shall be glad to hear our fortunes from you, mother. That is what -we came for,’ and he took a sovereign out of his pocket. - -The old Egyptian’s eyes fastened upon it, and her hand was stretched -out. - -‘Give me your hand,’ she said to Miss Wylde. - -The girl put out her open hand reluctantly, and the Egyptian gazed at -it so attentively that she appeared to have forgotten the coin. - -‘You have been in trouble, and he has saved you,’ croaked the woman. - -The girl started, and the Egyptian smiled at this corroborative -evidence. She had hazarded a guess at the situation, and hit the mark. - -She then proceeded to give an account of what would follow this -adventure, and caused Muriel Wylde to blush, and wish she was safely on -board again. - -Edgar’s future was soon told, in the usual strain. He was the hero of -the story, and would be rewarded in due time by the hand of the lady he -had rescued. - -Edgar gave the fortune-teller the sovereign, and asked her to direct -them to the quay. She cautiously opened the door, and peered out into -the darkness, listening attentively. She beckoned them to step out, and -then pointed in the direction in which they should go. - -They walked for some distance, and then reached the part of the town -where the cafés were still open, and men and women were drinking -coffee, seated round tables under the verandas and trees. - -They sat down at one of the tables and rested, refreshing themselves -with some excellent coffee. - -‘We must hurry back to the ship,’ said Edgar. ‘Your party may have -returned, and if so your mother will be very anxious.’ - -She was eager to go, and they rose from the table. As they walked away -a tall Egyptian followed them. It was one of the men Edgar had knocked -down. They were not out of danger yet. - -A long avenue led down to the quay, where the boats were generally -waiting to sail or row passengers back to the ship. - -The Egyptian followed them, keeping within the shadow of the trees, his -bare feet making no sound. - -Muriel Wylde was still weak from the effect of the shock she had -received, and Edgar had to support her. He seemed nothing loath to do -so, and his companion felt a sense of pleasurable security with his -strong arm round her waist. - -On reaching the quay Edgar called out to a boatman, who came slowly -towards them in his tiny craft. - -He explained that he wanted to be taken to the _Cuzco_, and the boatman -agreed. - -Edgar handed his companion down into the boat, and as she stepped on to -the seat she looked up and gave a cry of alarm. Behind Edgar stood the -tall Egyptian, who had crept stealthily up, and was about to stab Edgar -in the back. At her cry Edgar looked round, and, seeing no other way of -escape, he sprang into the water. The Egyptian sprang after him, and -grasped Edgar by the arm. A terrible struggle then took place, and in -the water the Egyptian proved the more powerful. - -The man in the boat made no movement until Muriel Wylde seized a round -pole, and tried to hit Edgar’s assailant on the head. The boatman then -took the part of his countryman, and attempted to seize the pole and -wrench it out of Muriel’s hands. The girl, however, was now thoroughly -roused. Edgar had rescued her, and she must do the same for him, for he -was in deadly peril. The Egyptian dragged Edgar down and got his head -under the water, with the evident intention of drowning him. - -A struggle commenced in the boat, but by a lucky stroke Muriel managed -to hit the boatman in the chest, and he fell overboard. The Egyptian -was not far from the boat, and Muriel, raising the pole, brought it -down heavily on his head, causing him to loose his hold of Edgar. - -Half suffocated, Edgar came to the surface, and struck out feebly for -the boat. - -Muriel leaned over the side and grasped him by the arm. Pulling with -all her strength, she managed to give him sufficient assistance to help -him to scramble into the boat. - -The two Egyptians in the water were on either side of the boat, and -were trying to upset it, and Muriel kept them from clambering in by -hitting at them with the pole. - -Edgar was well-nigh exhausted, but he managed to set the sail, and, as -the breeze was blowing from the shore, the boat soon made headway and -left the Egyptians behind. Finding pursuit hopeless, they swam ashore, -and stood there gesticulating furiously. - -Muriel, turning round to look at Edgar, saw he was unconscious. She -was accustomed to sailing-boats, and, having placed her jacket under -Edgar’s head, she steered with one hand and guided the sail with the -other. The boat sped along in the direction of the _Cuzco_, whose -lights were seen shining in the distance. - -Muriel Wylde sat watching Edgar, and when she thought over their -night’s adventures, she was thankful they had escaped with life. Edgar -was a handsome young fellow, and Muriel Wylde felt her heart beat fast -as she looked at him. They had been good friends on board during the -voyage, and Edgar’s mates had chaffed him about ‘pretty Miss Wylde.’ -Her mother had noticed her daughter’s partiality for Edgar’s society, -and did not discourage it, as she had taken a fancy to the young fellow. - -Before they reached the steamer, Muriel Wylde left the stern of the -boat for a moment to attend to Edgar. As she bent over him, he opened -his eyes and looked into her face, which was very near to his own. -Their eyes met, and they suddenly felt that something had been revealed -to each of them. - -Edgar took Muriel Wylde’s hands, and drew her towards him. She did not -resist, and when he kissed her she was not surprised or startled. It -seemed a fitting climax to the dangers they had passed through. - -So lost were they in each other, although neither spoke, they did not -notice they were close to the _Cuzco_. A loud ‘Ahoy!’ from the deck -roused them, and in a few minutes they were alongside the steamer, and -friendly hands were assisting them up the gangway. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIV. HOME AGAIN. - - -Their adventures at Ismailia formed the subject of conversation for -several days between Edgar and Muriel Wylde. With her mother’s consent, -Muriel accepted Edgar’s offer of marriage, and when the engagement -became known on board they were regarded with romantic interest by the -passengers. The remainder of the voyage proved uneventful. Muriel Wylde -and her mother left the steamer at Naples, and proceeded overland to -London, but Edgar remained on board with the team. - -On arriving at Tilbury, the eleven received a hearty welcome from a -large number of influential cricketers and lovers of the game. To -Edgar, all this was as nothing to the joy he felt at meeting his father -and Doris again. - -Elm Lodge looked much the same as when he went away, and the old home -was so peaceful that Edgar began to wonder how he had ever made up his -mind to leave it. He had much to relate to his father and sister, and, -needless to say, Will Brown entertained Doris in a manner agreeable to -that young lady. - -The wreck of the _Distant Shore_ was described again, and Robert Foster -noticed with pride how modestly Edgar spoke of the part he took in -saving Eva. - -‘Poor Manton!’ said Robert Foster. ‘I am sorry he was drowned, for a -better seaman could not be found. I should like to meet Wal Jessop, -and we must try and have little Eva over here, for we cannot spare you -again, Edgar, now we have got you at home.’ - -‘It would be splendid if Wal could be induced to bring Eva and his wife -home,’ said Edgar. ‘I must write and ask him. You have to meet Ben -Brody, who came over with us, and I am sure you will be amused at him. -He is a character, and a rough-and-ready customer, but a genuine good -fellow.’ - -When Edgar spoke of his engagement to Muriel Wylde, his father was -pleased he had found a girl after his own heart, for his son’s -happiness always held a foremost place with him. - -‘And what about the Australian eleven?’ said Robert Foster. ‘Are they -a strong team? It is rather too bad of you to play against the old -country. It places me in an awkward position. Of course, I am patriotic -enough to wish to see England victorious, and yet I shall be highly -delighted to see you pile up a big score.’ - -‘I shall do my best,’ said Edgar; ‘and every member of the team will -try hard to win the matches. I think we stand an excellent chance, and -you will have to put your best eleven in the field to beat us in the -test matches.’ - -‘Your men generally play well, and with constant practice they know -each other’s play thoroughly, but we have some splendid cricketers now, -and they will take a lot of beating,’ said his father. - -‘All the more credit to us, then, if we win,’ said Edgar. - -The members of an Australian eleven have plenty of hard work to go -through when in England, and Edgar could not remain idle at home. -He went to Mitcham to practise on the famous common, and his father -accompanied him to see how the men shaped. To two or three of the older -members of the team, who had been in England before, Robert Foster was -well known, and his appearance with Edgar was hailed with delight. - -William Murch, the captain of the Australians, shook hands heartily -with Robert Foster, and said with a smile: - -‘We have had you against us on many occasions, but I think we can cry -quits now we have your son on our side.’ - -‘How does Edgar shape?’ asked Robert Foster. - -‘I consider him one of our best bats, and expect great things of him. -He has a happy knack of making a big score when it is most wanted. He -is a smart fielder and a good change bowler. In fact, I cannot pay him -a higher compliment than to say he is as good a man as his father,’ -said Murch. - -Edgar was now at the nets, and making the balls fly about merrily. - -‘He does not seem very stiff after the voyage,’ said Robert Foster. -‘His wrist play is good, but his style could be improved a bit. I must -give him a wrinkle or two.’ - -‘That will be going over to the enemy’s camp,’ said Murch, with a -laugh; ‘but we shall be glad of such a valuable coach.’ - -‘By Jove! so it will,’ said Robert Foster. ‘But I cannot resist the -temptation, all the same. We cricketers, I am glad to say, are always -ready to help each other, and I have had many a good wrinkle given me -by Australians.’ - -‘Ah! it is a game that stands ahead of all other games,’ said Murch -enthusiastically. ‘It is a genuine sport, and a manly sport. It not -only gives pleasure to the players, but to thousands of people in all -parts of the world. Lovers of cricket, no matter where you go, are -always willing to help each other.’ - -‘You are right,’ said Robert Foster. ‘Cricket will never take a back -seat to any other game.’ - -‘Look out!’ said Murch, as he dodged a ball hit by Edgar. ‘Your son is -evidently bent upon letting us know he is at the nets.’ - -When he had finished his turn with the bat Edgar joined his father and -Murch. - -‘How do you think I shape?’ said Edgar. - -‘Very well,’ replied his father, ‘but your style is rather faulty. I -think I can give you a hint as to what I mean when we reach home.’ - -‘Now then, Will, it’s your turn,’ said Edgar, and Will Murch went to -the nets with his bat under his arm. - -‘You have seen him play before?’ said Edgar. - -‘Many times,’ said his father. ‘He is a splendid bat, and I should -think he will make a good captain. Is he popular with the team?’ - -‘Very,’ said Edgar. ‘I believe every one of us thinks he is the best -man that could have been selected.’ - -‘That is the proper feeling to start with,’ said Robert Foster. ‘If you -have no confidence in your captain, defeat is almost certain.’ - -When Robert Foster had seen the Australians at practice on several -occasions, he came to the conclusion it was the strongest team that had -yet come to England. - -‘The test matches will be a treat,’ he said. ‘If honours are divided in -the first two matches, what tremendous excitement there will be over -the final!’ - -‘Which I hope we shall win,’ said Edgar. - -Doris Foster was quite as interested as her father in the probable -result of the tour. Although Will Brown had not returned from Australia -with enough wealth to warrant him in setting up an establishment of his -own, Doris thought she would not be risking much in accepting him as -her lover. With Robert Foster’s sanction they became engaged, and the -family circle at Elm Lodge increased. - -Ben Brody came to Elm Lodge, and soon made himself at home. Robert -Foster discovered that men of Brody’s stamp are to be trusted, and -although he might have been out of place amidst the sham and humbug of -a society drawing-room, Ben Brody was in his element at Elm Lodge. - -His quaint remarks caused roars of laughter, and he drew some amusing -pictures of station life in which Edgar and Will Brown were conspicuous -figures. - -‘I’ll tell you what it is,’ he said to Edgar one day as they sat on the -lawn enjoying the fragrant weed, ‘this beats Yanda hollow. What a trump -your dad is! Talk about colonial hospitality, it is a mere trifle to -the way in which I have been treated here. I have lived on the fat of -the land, while those poor beggars at Yanda have been stifling their -ill-feelings with the usual mutton. Then there’s your sister--but she -ought to have a whole vocabulary to herself and not be mixed up with -such matters. Will Brown’s a lucky fellow, and so for the matter of -that are you. Girls like Miss Muriel Wylde are not found every day. I -wonder if you will ever return to Australia.’ - -‘That remains to be seen,’ said Edgar. ‘After the tour will be time -enough to think about that.’ - -The opening match of the tour was played at Sheffield Park against Lord -Sheffield’s eleven. Ever ready to assist in promoting honest manly -games, H.R.H. the Prince of Wales honoured them with his presence. -Will Murch was introduced to his Royal Highness, and was naturally much -elated. The match resulted in a win for the Australians, but Edgar did -not ‘come off’ on this occasion. - -As the weeks rolled by and the tour progressed, it was easy to see the -Australian eleven was a fine team. So far they had only been twice -beaten--once by an M.C.C. eleven, and in the first match against -England. - -Their second struggle with the cracks of the home team had resulted -in a win for the Australians. Edgar played well in these matches, but -had done nothing particularly wonderful. Against several of the county -elevens he had made good scores. He astonished W. G. at Gloucester by -the way he knocked the champion’s bowling about, and the hero of a -hundred fights warmly congratulated him on his performance. - -‘I always thought W. G. was a jealous man,’ said Edgar. - -‘Not a bit of it,’ said Robert Foster. ‘He’s one of the first to -recognise merit in a cricketer. I’ll tell you what he is jealous about.’ - -‘And that is?’ asked Edgar. - -‘The honour of the game, and the honour of his side when he captains a -team,’ said Robert Foster. - -The final test match was to be played at Lord’s, and the greatest -interest was manifested in the result. Throughout England enthusiastic -cricketers waxed eloquent over the forthcoming struggle. In Australia -every item of news was eagerly read and discussed. It might safely be -said that millions of people anxiously awaited the result of this great -match. The picking of the England eleven was a difficult task, but at -last it was done, and Robert Foster could not find a fault with the -team. - -‘They ought to beat you, Edgar,’ he said. ‘It is the best team that -could have been selected. Grace has had a large finger in that pie, and -no fault can be found with it. I cannot pick out a weak spot.’ - -‘They have not won yet,’ said Edgar; ‘and all our men are in splendid -trim. Murch is sanguine, and he’s not given to over-estimate our -chances. Lord’s has been our unlucky ground, but that is no reason why -we should not prove successful.’ - -‘What a sight it will be!’ said Robert Foster. ‘I hope you will pile up -a big score.’ - -‘So do I,’ replied Edgar. ‘This is my chance, and I shall do my best.’ - -The great match was to commence on Monday, and on the Sunday quite a -party of cricketers assembled at Elm Lodge. Will Murch, Bannman, Black, -Royle of the Australians, and two of the English team enjoyed Robert -Foster’s hospitality and listened to the yarns spun by Ben Brody. - -Muriel Wylde and her mother were in London for the match, and came to -spend the day at Elm Lodge. Muriel and Doris were great friends, and -found much to talk about. It was an eventful Sunday, this day before -the great match, which formed almost the sole topic of conversation. -Many were the surmises as to who would make the big scores, and which -bowler would secure the best average. - -‘We count upon you this time,’ said Murch to Edgar. ‘It is your turn to -knock up a big score against England.’ - -‘I mean to try,’ said Edgar, ‘and I feel very fit.’ - -‘Muriel will be terribly disappointed if you make less than a hundred,’ -said Doris. - -‘That is rather a large order,’ laughed Edgar, ‘but I must do my best -to execute it.’ - -Late hours were not kept that night. Robert Foster packed them off in -good time. - -‘You shall have a night of it when the match is over,’ he said to -Will Murch. ‘Win or lose, you must come here to celebrate the event. -Remember I am equally interested in both sides.’ - -As Edgar bade Muriel good-night, she said: - -‘I am quite anxious about you, Edgar. I feel sure you will succeed. -I shall be terribly excited during the first over, but when you are -firmly set and making a score, it will be glorious.’ - - - - -CHAPTER XXV. THE SCENE AT LORD’S. - - -An enormous crowd assembled on the famous cricket-ground at Lord’s to -witness the final battle between England and Australia. The record -attendance was registered for the opening day of a match, and it was -with difficulty that the crowd could be kept within bounds. It reminded -old race-goers of a Derby Day to see so many vehicles driving in the -direction of the ground. Although the sky was dull and threatening, -this did not damp the ardour of the spectators. The members’ pavilion -was thronged, and also the reserved stands and enclosure. A dense mass -of people filled every available standing and sitting place in the -cheaper portion of the ground. No sooner were the doors opened than a -rush commenced for the best seats, which were secured by those who had -been patiently waiting from an early hour in the morning. - -Outside the high walls it was more like a fair than anything else. -Itinerant vendors of a variety of eatables did a good trade, and -evaded the attentions of the police with remarkable skill. No sooner -did the man in blue move a coster on than he ‘bobbed up serenely’ in a -different place. Portraits of the cricketers were hawked about, though -the celebrities depicted would have had some difficulty in recognising -their own faces. The excitement over the match was tremendous. The -bus-drivers discussed the chances of success with the passengers -nearest to them, and many of the cabmen wore the English colours on -their whips. Morning editions of the evening papers met with a ready -sale, and every scrap of news anent the great match was pounced upon -with avidity. - -Before noon a few drops of rain fell, and with the gathering clouds -the faces of the people became sombre, and their looks gloomy. A heavy -shower would make a good deal of difference, and none knew it better -than the members of the teams. - -Robert Foster stood inside the pavilion, with his son and Will Murch, -anxiously scanning the clouds for a sign of a break. They had not long -to wait. The blue sky became visible, and the sun chased the dulness -away and shed its brilliant rays on the scene. - -And what a sight it was as they looked from the pavilion over the -ground! A dense mass of people lined the enclosure, and even pressed -over the boundary line in some parts of the ground. To the left of the -pavilion the enclosure was gay with the costumes of the ladies, and -they seemed as eager for the game to commence as any of the male sex. - -Doris Foster accompanied Muriel Wylde and her mother, and they were -escorted by Will Brown and Ben Brody, who felt slightly uncomfortable -in a hard hat and a pair of gloves--not to mention a new suit, made by -a fashionable tailor. They occupied seats in the first enclosure, and -had an excellent view of the ground. - -The mere mention of Lord’s conjures up wonderful feats in the cricket -field, and recalls memories of men who played on its green sward. A -glance round the pavilion shows the members have not been unmindful of -their doughty champions of the game. It gives the history of cricket, -its rise and progress, in a pictorial form, to look at the various -prints, paintings, and engravings hanging on the walls. The ‘tall hat’ -period is well represented, and young cricketers may well be forgiven -for smiling at the costumes of the men who made the game what it is. -The smile, however, was not at the men--there was nothing but praise -for them. Old stagers waxed eloquent over the doings of the cricketers -of their younger days. They vowed there were as good men then as now, -although they had to confess the game had improved--and consequently -the players also. - -A gray-headed veteran came up to Robert Foster and said: - -‘We had big crowds in our day, but nothing like this,’ and he waved his -hand in a comprehensive sweep round the circle of faces. - -Edgar was introduced to the veteran, who said: - -‘I remember the first time I saw your father play. He was about your -age then, and he _was_ a bat. I’ll never forget it. It was on this very -ground--Surrey against Middlesex. He won the match, my boy. I’d sooner -you were for us than against us to-day, if you can play as well as your -father did then.’ - -‘I recollect that match,’ said Robert; ‘but you give me too much credit -when you say I won it for the team.’ - -‘Not a bit of it,’ replied the veteran. ‘Ask any man who saw it, and -I’ll guarantee he tells the same story. Is it not recorded in the -annals of cricket?’ - -‘We’ve lost the toss,’ said Edgar. ‘The usual luck at Lord’s.’ - -‘I expect they will bat,’ said Robert Foster. - -‘I doubt it,’ said Edgar. ‘The ground is a bit tricky and in favour of -the bowlers. Grace has gone to have a good look at the wicket. He knows -there are no chances to be thrown away.’ - -The tall figure of the English captain, with his black, bushy beard, -stood out boldly against the background of people. It was in the days -when Grace was at his best, and Dr. E. M. was another of the valiant -brothers who took the field; Shaw and Morley, the famous Notts bowlers, -were in their prime, and Daft had not yet retired from the field--when -such grand men as A. P. Lucas, A. G. Steel, A. Lyttelton and Lord -Harris were seen at nearly every big match. It was an anxious moment -for everyone as Grace consulted with two of his team as to whether they -should bat. - -At last the decision came. The Englishmen were to bat, and a mighty -cheer went up from the crowd. - -‘The pitch is all right, or Grace would not have gone in,’ said Robert -Foster. - -‘Perhaps he thinks it will wear all right for their innings, and leave -us with the ground cut up,’ said Murch. - -People settled down in their places, and made themselves as comfortable -as possible. As the Australians filed on the ground, headed by Murch, -cheer after cheer was given them--for the ‘Kangaroo boys’ had become -very popular. - -The commencement of a great match is always fraught with intense -excitement. How will the game go? Will there be a stand for the first -wicket? - -The brothers Grace, W. G. and E. M., came out to face the bowling, and -again the cheers broke out from all parts of the ground. Two good men -and good bats were going to open the game for the honour of Old England -against the attack of her young country’s sons. - -The English captain went through the preliminaries usual with him. -He calmly surveyed the field, noting with keen eyes how each man was -placed. He took his block, and then patted the ground in a fatherly way -with his bat, as though requesting the pitch to behave well to him. -Then he put his bat under his arm and leisurely fastened his glove. -Having put himself to rights, he was ready for the attack. - -The battle had commenced, and it soon became lively. Both men were in -form, and the Australians had plenty of leather-hunting. Boundary hits -did not come quite so quickly as might have been expected, as the ball -seemed to fall rather dead, and did not roll far. When an adjournment -for luncheon was made, both Graces were still in, and the crowd was -jubilant. - -Murch was not at all depressed. He never gave in, or had the faintest -intention of doing so. - -‘After luncheon will do it,’ he said. ‘There will be a separation then.’ - -He was right, for in the first over E. M. Grace had his stumps upset. - -It was, however, uphill work fighting against such a powerful batting -team. Man after man came in and piled up a score, and the captain was -not got rid of until he had placed one hundred and fifty-two to his -credit. He had played a grand innings, and fully maintained his great -reputation. - -The Englishmen were not disposed of until they had piled up the large -score of four hundred and two. - -‘What do you think of it now?’ asked Robert Foster of Edgar. - -‘It is a big score, but we may equal it,’ he replied. - -‘I admire your pluck, but I hardly think you will do that,’ was the -remark of a friend of Mr. Foster’s. - -They did not do it. The Australians made an unfortunate start, for -Murch, their great bat and popular captain, was caught before he had -scored. - -Edgar made a fair show, and put on thirty runs before he was bowled; -but none of the team made a good stand, and the innings closed, for -a hundred and fifty runs--two hundred and fifty-two behind their -opponents. This was a terribly black outlook for the Australians, and -everyone was disappointed at their display. - -Muriel Wylde felt vexed, and she knew Edgar would be much cut up about -it. He came to see her, and tried to put the best face he could on the -matter. - -‘We must avoid a one innings defeat, anyhow,’ he said; ‘I cannot make -it out at all. It is sheer bad luck, for the wicket was good. I think -when Murch got out for a duck it made our fellows feel a bit nervous.’ - -‘You played well enough,’ said Brody. - -‘That you did,’ said Will Brown; ‘but I’m afraid you are in for an -awful dressing.’ - -‘No telling what may happen in cricket,’ said Edgar. ‘I have seen an -even worse match than this pulled out of the fire.’ - -‘Then you have not lost hope?’ said Muriel. - -‘By no means,’ said Edgar. ‘I have a presentiment we shall make a big -score, and prove what we really can do.’ - -Robert Foster was proud of the display of the home eleven, but he could -not help feeling a pang of regret that the Australians had not made a -better show. - -Will Murch was determined to have his revenge for the catch that -disposed of him, and said he felt like making a big score. He got his -men together, and talked the matter over. - -‘I’ll go in first again,’ he said, ‘with Bannman, and we must make a -stand somehow. If we can make a big score the other side may be got out -without getting the requisite runs, or they may not have time to get -them, and we shall make a draw of it.’ - -Edgar Foster was to go in at the fall of the first wicket, and Murch -was very anxious every man should do his level best. - -‘They will be very down in the mouth about it at home,’ he said. ‘We -can all imagine how they felt when they saw the poor stand we made; -we’ll try and change the tune for them. Remember, lads, that every run -tells. Run carefully, but run well, and then it is surprising how a -few singles tot up and swell the total. Bat carefully until you are -set, and when you feel safe don’t spare them. They have given us some -leather-hunting, let us return the compliment.’ - -The cheery words of their captain put heart into the team, and it was -with considerable confidence they saw Murch and Bannman walk to the -wickets to commence the second innings. - -Edgar went over to his father to watch the start, and his heart beat -fast as he saw Murch prepare to take the first over. - -‘This is better, much better,’ said Robert Foster, as Murch hit a -couple of fours in his first over. ‘We can afford to be generous, and -wish you all to do well this innings.’ - -Bannman played a cautious game, and left the bulk of the run-getting to -his captain. After half an hour’s play there was a change of bowling. -Will Murch treated the new-comer with scant ceremony. - -To Edgar’s great delight the Australian captain hit the bowling all -over the field. His powerful drives and clean cuts elicited well -deserved applause, which was freely bestowed. - -‘If you go on at this rate,’ said Robert Foster, ‘it will put a very -different complexion on the game. Your men always did play a good -uphill fight.’ - -‘And will do so to-day,’ said Edgar. ‘By Jove! that was a narrow shave.’ - -Bannman made a miss-hit, and the ball went near to the fielder at -point, but he just failed to hold it, although he touched it. - -When the second day’s play ended, Murch and Bannman were not out, and -the score stood at one hundred and thirty, of which number Will Murch -had made eighty-four. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVI. AN UPHILL GAME. - - -The brilliant stand made by the Australian captain and Bannman caused -intense excitement, and the attendance on the final day of the match -was enormous. Hundreds of people who anticipated a tame finish, and a -one-sided affair, changed their opinions upon reading the score in the -morning papers. Contrary to expectation, the third day’s play promised -to be the most interesting of all. - -When Murch and Bannman commenced again, every stroke was followed -with interest. Runs came freely, and Bannman was not disposed of -until he had made seventy. Then Edgar Foster joined his captain, and -the reception he received on going to the wicket proved his father’s -prowess in the field was not forgotten. Foster, in days gone by, was a -name to conjure by, and people remembered Robert Foster’s feats with -the bat. - -Muriel Wylde felt anxious, and whispered to Doris Foster: - -‘I do hope Edgar will make a score.’ - -‘He will try to do so, because he knows it will give you pleasure,’ -said Doris. - -Murch spoke to Edgar when he went in to bat, and gave him a hint or two -as to the bowling. Edgar played the last ball of the over, and then -Murch scored a couple in the next over. - -The bowling was splendid. Both Shaw and Morley were doing their level -best. Edgar found Alf Shaw could deceive a batsman, and put in a swift -ball when least expected. He scored a single off the last ball, and -then faced Morley. Edgar was partial to swift bowling, as Morley soon -discovered, and the over proved productive. - -‘I’m getting well set,’ thought Edgar. ‘I believe I’m in for a good -score.’ - -The runs came freely, and it was not until he had made a hundred and -sixty runs that Murch was caught. - -He had done splendidly, and his return to the pavilion was a triumph. -Royle joined Edgar and played steadily. - -Grace took the ball and faced Edgar. The English captain knew Edgar -was a free hitter, and placed his men far out. Then he tried to tempt -him to send a catch. Edgar narrowly escaped being caught at the second -ball of the over, and this made him careful. The last ball, however, -was one he could not resist hitting. He drove it straight as a dart, -and it landed over the boundary. It was a tremendous hit, and caused an -outburst of cheering. - -The next exciting moment came when E. M. Grace made a magnificent catch -at long-on from a very high hit by Royle. He caught the ball with one -hand, having had to run for it, and, much to Royle’s surprise, held it. - -Donnell came next, and then there was some big hitting. Both batsmen -knocked the bowling about terribly. When Edgar had scored fifty there -was a hearty cheer, and he appeared likely to make as big a score as -his captain. The Australians were playing a splendid uphill game, -and keeping up their reputation as ‘men who never know when they are -beaten.’ - -At the fall of the seventh wicket the two hundred and fifty-two runs -had been wiped off, and they were over fifty to the good. - -The game now became most exciting, as the Englishmen knew if they did -not quickly dispose of the Australians the game would end in a draw. -Each man worked hard, and the fielding and bowling was splendid. - -Still Edgar Foster kept on increasing his score, and passed his -century, to the great delight of his father and his friends. - -Connor was now in, and his hits were marvellous. The giant--he was -about six feet four--lifted the balls all over the ground, and safely -out of the reach of the fielders. - -When the last wicket fell Edgar Foster was a hundred and fifty, not -out, and the score was five hundred and two runs, or two hundred and -fifty ahead of the Englishmen. - -Such a grand uphill game it was generally acknowledged had never been -played before. Edgar Foster was overwhelmed with congratulations, and -Muriel Wylde showed her delight on her face. - -‘It was splendid, Edgar,’ she said. ‘I believe you would have made two -hundred or more.’ - -‘I felt like it,’ said Edgar. ‘I knew you were watching me, and that -put me on my mettle.’ - -It seemed well nigh a hopeless task for the Englishmen to get two -hundred and fifty runs in the short time at their disposal. However, -they lost no time in making a start to try to do so. - -Strange to say, they did not bat in anything like the form shown in -their first innings. Three wickets fell for under fifty runs, W. G. -Grace being unluckily run out. - -The Australians fielded with wonderful skill. Hardly a ball got past -them, and many boundary hits were saved. - -Seven wickets fell for a hundred runs, and now it was the turn of the -Australians to endeavour to get their opponents out before the call of -time. - -The Englishmen had reckoned with certainty upon a draw, but they now -had to fight hard to avert defeat, and even a draw would not be in -their favour. - -‘It is a most extraordinary game,’ said Robert Foster. ‘The glorious -uncertainty of cricket again. You never can tell how it will go until -a match is over, no matter how favourable it may look for a particular -side.’ - -He had joined the ladies, and they were all watching the game with -interest, taking keen note of every good stroke and every brilliant -piece of fielding. - -Will Brown looked at his watch. - -‘They have only half-an-hour left,’ he said. ‘I should not wonder if -they were got out in that time.’ - -The thousands of spectators also wondered how the game would end. - -Ten minutes before time Morley joined Shaw at the wickets. They were -not good bats--anything but that, and the crowd knew it. Morley hit -out recklessly and made a couple of fours, and Shaw played steadily. -The Australians did all in their power to separate them, but, as luck -would have it, they failed to do so. The game ended in a draw, which -practically amounted to a victory for the Australians, as the English -eleven required over seventy runs to win. - -The result of this match was the subject of conversation for some days, -and the grand struggle made by the Australians was commented upon on -all sides. - -At Elm Lodge the event was duly celebrated, and, as Robert Foster -promised, the party made a night of it. - -When the tour of the Australians was finished they left for home, but -Edgar Foster did not return with them. At his father’s request he -remained at home. - -‘What will Eva think when she finds that I have not returned?’ said -Edgar. ‘I promised her I would go back.’ - -‘We must try and get her over here,’ said his father. ‘I shall feel -lonely when you and Doris have left me, and Eva will be nice company -for me.’ - -‘She is a dear little thing,’ said Edgar, ‘and you will love her as -much as though she were your own child.’ - -‘Do you think every soul on board the _Distant Shore_, with the -exception of Eva and yourself, was drowned?’ said Robert Foster. - -‘There can hardly be any doubt about it,’ said Edgar. ‘Why do you ask?’ - -‘Because I have received a rather mysterious letter,’ said Robert -Foster; ‘it bears the Sydney postmark, and contains news that may -interest you. I will show it you.’ - -Robert Foster unlocked his desk, and put his hand in one of the -pigeon-holes. He looked through the letters, but could not find the one -for which he searched. - -‘Strange,’ he said, ‘I am sure I put it there.’ - -‘You may have dropped it, or torn it up by mistake,’ said Edgar. -‘Perhaps you remember the contents?’ - -‘The bulk of them,’ said his father. ‘The letter stated that the writer -had been on a cruise to the South Sea Islands, where he met a man who -had been saved from a wreck. He believes, from hints the man, who -was very reticent, let fall, that he was saved from the wreck of the -_Distant Shore_. When he returned to Sydney he met with Wal Jessop, -who was much interested in what he was told about this man. Wal Jessop -described Captain Manton, and my correspondent says he firmly believes -from this description it is Captain Manton who was saved and is now in -the South Seas. He did not tell Wal Jessop this, because the man seemed -to have a great desire to be left alone, and had no wish to let people -know he had been saved from the wreck of the _Distant Shore_. It is a -most extraordinary story, and I wish I had the letter. I must have torn -it up by mistake. It was careless of me to do so.’ - -Edgar was amazed at what his father said, and replied: - -‘I can hardly credit this story. How any man could live if washed out -to sea on such a night I do not know. If it is Captain Manton, surely -he would have made some sign before this. It cannot possibly be Eva’s -father, for I saw him standing on the deck as the ship struck, and from -the look on his face, and the way he waved farewell to me, I knew he -meant to go down with her.’ - -‘He may have been washed out to sea, and found a spar or something -to support him. I have a peculiar feeling that this man who was -saved from the wreck is Manton. I have had strange dreams about him -since I received the letter, and I am not a dreamer as a rule, or a -superstitious man. I knew Manton well; he was a proud man, and very -sensitive. If he be the man so strangely saved, I think it is precisely -what he would do--to hide himself away in some lonely spot, in order to -make people think him dead.’ - -‘But surely he would come forward and tell the story of the wreck,’ -said Edgar. ‘No blame attaches to him; he did his utmost to save the -ship, and went down with her when he found he could not do so. Then -there is Eva. He would want to see his child again; surely he would -hear that she had been saved.’ - -‘He may not have heard. In such a lonely spot one hears very little -news from the outer world.’ - -‘Do you really place any faith in your mysterious correspondent’s -letter?’ - -‘I do, Edgar, and for this reason: I feel no man would have written -such a letter had he not been convinced of the truth of its contents.’ - -‘But why should he write to you?’ asked Edgar. - -‘Wal Jessop probably told him how you saved Eva from the wreck, and it -would occur to him that you might wish to know what he thought he had -discovered. He no doubt wrote to me, thinking I would tell you if I -thought it well to do so,’ said Robert Foster. - -‘It may be as you surmise,’ said Edgar. ‘I shall never be easy in my -mind until I have seen the man who wrote the letter, and heard all he -has to tell.’ - -‘That would mean another trip to Australia,’ said his father with a -smile. ‘What would Muriel say to that?’ - -‘I do not think she would object to my going, for we are not to be -married, as you know, until she is twenty-one. Her mother will not -consent to part with her before that time. In any case I should not -have the journey for nothing, because I could bring Eva back with me.’ - -‘So you could,’ said Robert Foster. ‘We should be put down as a couple -of foolish fellows if anyone knew what you went to Sydney for.’ - -‘I shall tell no one, with the exception of Muriel,’ said Edgar. ‘She -will not think it foolish.’ - -‘I ought to tell you more,’ said Robert Foster. ‘There was a sketch in -the letter, and it bore a strange resemblance to Manton. I cannot make -out where the letter has got to.’ - -‘Was it a sketch made on the spot, or drawn from memory?’ - -‘Drawn in Sydney, I believe the writer said.’ - -‘Then it may have been drawn from Wal Jessop’s description,’ said Edgar. - -‘Possibly, but I hardly think so. It seemed to me to be a sketch just -as the man who drew it remembered to have seen him. I did not tell you -of this before, because I thought it might upset you during the tour.’ - -‘I should have thought a good deal about it, no doubt,’ said Edgar; -‘and perhaps it was as well you did not tell me.’ - -Edgar pondered over what his father told him, and the more he thought -over it, the more impossible it seemed to him that anyone, least of all -Captain Manton, should have been saved from the wreck of the _Distant -Shore_. - -The spirit of adventure, however, was still strong within him, and this -letter his father had received would serve as an excuse, if a poor -one, to revisit Australia. He communicated his intention to Muriel, -and when she heard the reason for his setting out again she did not -consider it so improbable as Edgar himself did. - -So it was arranged that Edgar should again voyage to the Colonies, and -Ben Brody was glad of a comrade to return with him. Will Brown, having -obtained a situation in a large shipping office, decided to remain in -England, and Doris Foster was consoled by the thought that if Edgar -left again, she would still have a companion of her own age to whom she -was much attached. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVII. THE CAPTAIN OR HIS GHOST. - - -In due course Edgar Foster arrived in Sydney again. He thought it -better to take Wal Jessop into his confidence, and related to him the -real reason of his return to Australia. - -Wal Jessop remembered the circumstances, and said he did not think -Edgar would easily find the man. - -‘He spoke of sailing for America,’ said Wal; ‘and as I have seen -nothing of him for some time, I think he must have gone away.’ - -‘I mean to have a cruise in the South Seas, at any rate,’ said Edgar. -‘I have never been there, and it will be interesting. I am sure to -hear something about this man from the natives and traders.’ - -Wal Jessop thought for a few moments, and then said: - -‘I have a schooner that would suit your purpose, and I should not mind -making a voyage with you. It would be better than going alone, and I -have been in the South Seas several times.’ - -‘That would be splendid!’ said Edgar, overjoyed at the prospect of -having Wal Jessop with him. - -Wal Jessop communicated his intention of accompanying Edgar to his -wife, and although she did not care for him to leave her again to go on -a cruise, she raised no objections when she heard what object they had -in view. - -‘How strange it will be if you find Captain Manton there!’ she said. -‘Even if such a thing happened I am afraid he would not return with -you.’ - -‘We shall persuade him to do so,’ said Wal, ‘if we find him; but -that is more than we hope for. Still, more extraordinary things than -this have happened over shipwrecks, and truth is often stranger than -fiction.’ - -Wal Jessop’s schooner did not take much fitting out for the voyage, for -both he and Edgar were used to roughing it. A couple of good men were -engaged to go with them, upon whom Wal Jessop knew he could rely. - -They set sail early one morning, and were soon outside the heads, -going along at a fair rate of speed in their small craft. - -‘She sails well,’ said Edgar. - -‘Many a craft twice her size does not skim over the sea so fast,’ said -Wal. - -Edgar thoroughly enjoyed being on board the schooner. It was vastly -different from the life on an ocean liner. They had on board a stock of -goods to trade with the natives, and hoped to make the trip profitable. -The wind and weather being in their favour, they sailed merrily along, -and there was every prospect of their making a fast trip. - -Wal Jessop suggested going to Fiji first of all. - -‘It’s a jolly place,’ he said, ‘and will not be out of our way, and we -are not tied for time.’ - -‘It is a good thing your wife cannot hear you,’ said Edgar, laughing. -‘I fancy I heard you say we should return as quickly as possible.’ - -‘So we shall,’ said Wal; ‘but we made no stipulation as to the course -we should take.’ - -They made sail for Levuka, the former capital of Fiji, Suva being the -present capital. Levuka is situated on a narrow strip of beach, from -which the backbone of Ovalau rises precipitately to a height of 2,500 -feet, and falls in a similar manner on the other side. - -Levuka, Edgar found, consisted of one main street about a mile in -length, which runs along the beach from old Government House to the -native village at the other end. The ground ascends rapidly on leaving -the beach, and the hills around are dotted with pretty villas. The -stores and hotels face the water, and here Edgar and Wal took in a -fresh stock of provisions for the schooner. - -After leaving Levuka, they sailed along the coast and saw a number of -small native towns dotted about at varying intervals, usually among a -little grove of cocoa-nuts or bananas. - -They landed near one of these native villages and obtained a supply -of yams and sweet potatoes, also bananas in any quantity. The village -was surrounded by filth and garbage of all sorts, and among this -highly-scented mess a number of scraggy pigs, thin hens, and young -children were rummaging. The stagnant water lying about attracted -swarms of mosquitoes and flies. - -Edgar entered one of the houses and was almost choked with the smoke, -and was glad to get a breath of fresh air. The earthen floor of the -house he could just discern was covered with dry grass over which were -spread a few mats. The men seemed a lazy lot of fellows, passing the -bulk of their time in smoking. They went inland for several miles, but -found the country hilly and uninteresting. - -They saw numerous inland villages nestling in the valley or perched on -the top of a hill. After leaving Fiji they sailed for the New Hebrides, -rather an inhospitable country, so Edgar understood. Wal Jessop had, -however, been to Tana before, and meant to steer for that place. - -‘What sort of a place is Tana?’ asked Edgar as they sat idly in the -schooner with the blue sky shining brilliantly overhead, and the blue -water of the ocean all around them. - -‘It is a volcanic island,’ said Wal. ‘There are several of them in the -group, and on many of them the natives speak different languages. It is -a circular island, with a high mountain in the centre which we ought to -see before long. The mountain is constantly in eruption, and answers -the purpose of a lighthouse. It is covered with vegetation almost to -the top.’ - -‘I hope we shall not have an earthquake during our stay on the island. -I have experienced one already, during our exploration in the cave of -Enooma, and I should not care for the experience to be repeated,’ said -Edgar. - -Next morning the island of Tana came in sight, and Edgar marvelled -at its beauty as seen from the schooner. In the centre of the island -rose the high mountain, as Wal Jessop had described it, and smoke -and fire were issuing from the top. They were not long in reaching a -landing-place, and on the beach they saw a number of native canoes, -some about fifteen feet long, and others from twenty-five to nearly -fifty feet in length. - -When the natives saw the schooner let go her anchor, two canoes put off -and were quickly paddled alongside. The natives in them were rather -under the middle stature and the colour of old copper. Their faces -were painted a reddish colour, and looked oily and sticky. Their hair -was frizzy and of a light-brown colour, and was twisted and curled into -numerous tails, which were thrown back from the forehead and hung down -the back. It looked for all the world like a wig made of whipcord, -Edgar thought. - -‘These fellows are Tanese,’ said Wal. ‘I must try and make them -understand a few questions.’ - -He spoke to one of the natives, who was taller than his companions, and -asked him to come on board the schooner. Without the least hesitation -the man did so. As he stood on deck, Edgar saw that he was a well-made, -athletic young fellow. The septum of his nose was pierced, and through -it was inserted a reed horizontally, but not so as to project beyond -either nostril. He had tortoiseshell earrings in his ears, about half -a dozen hanging down on each side, and the weight had enlarged the -aperture until a child’s hand might have been passed through. He was -not tattooed, but on his breast a rude device of a fish had been either -cut or burnt in, and on the upper part of his arms was a leaf done in a -similar way. He had no clothes on except a matting bag round the loins. -He had armlets on, and also three large whale’s teeth on three strings -hanging horizontally on his breast. - -‘He’s a chief,’ said Wal. ‘I can tell that by those teeth he has on his -breast.’ - -‘He is a formidable-looking savage,’ said Edgar. ‘I should not care to -have a hit with that club he carries.’ - -Wal Jessop motioned the chief to sit down, which he did, and was -presented with a necklace of bright-coloured beads which delighted him -immensely. - -The other natives in the canoes were looking at the schooner with eager -eyes, evidently with the expectation of getting a few presents. - -The chief, whose name was Meri, spoke a few words of English, and -as Wal Jessop knew a little of the Tana language, they managed to -understand each other. - -Although Edgar could not make out what they were talking about, he knew -Wal Jessop was questioning him as to the white men who visited the -island. - -‘Psan Aremama,’ said Meri. - -‘There is a white man on the island,’ said Wal to Edgar. ‘We must go -ashore and try and meet him. Meri knows where he is to be found, but he -avoids the coast.’ - -‘Strange a white man should be here,’ said Edgar. ‘It may be the very -man we are in search of.’ - -‘If it turns out to be Manton, it will be stranger still,’ said Wal. - -Meri agreed to take them ashore in his canoe, and to make room for them -ordered two of the men to jump out and swim back to land. - -Wal Jessop asked if there were sharks about, for he saw the natives -were frightened, but dared not disobey the chief. - -Meri laughed, showing his even teeth, and hinted that it would be good -sport to see a shark or two hunt the natives. - -‘Pleasant sort of man to work for,’ said Edgar, when Wal had explained. - -The canoe shot away from the side of the schooner. Wal and Edgar had -their rifles with them and also a number of beads, trinkets, and pieces -of bright-coloured cloths, with which to propitiate the natives. - -As they neared the shore one of the natives who was swimming dived, and -before he came to the surface the water was dyed with blood. - -‘Laumasan! [good],’ chuckled Meri. - -The native came to the surface, and they saw he had dived and stabbed a -shark that had been in pursuit. - -‘That was cleverly done,’ said Wal. - -‘They must have some pluck,’ said Edgar. - -‘Good fighters, many of them,’ said Wal. ‘We must try and get them to -give us an exhibition of spear-throwing and stone-slinging. It will -interest you.’ - -They got out of the canoes and waded through the surf to the beach. -Here a number of natives, men and women, were gathered. The women were -fairly well covered with long girdles reaching below the knee. These -girdles were made of rolled dried fibre of the banana stalk, which was -soft to touch and very like hemp. They also wore a few ornaments, and -their hair was shorter than the men’s, standing erect in a forest of -little curls about an inch long. - -The chief conducted them to his hut, which was rudely constructed, but -large enough to hold half a dozen persons comfortably. This hut was -built amongst the trees, and there were huts of a smaller size for -about eight or ten families. - -The chief gave them to understand that they must join them at the -marum, or place of public meeting. - -This meeting was held under a banyan tree in a large clear space. All -the men assembled here at sundown for their evening meal. - -A bowl of kava was prepared by chewing the root and ejecting the -contents of the mouth into a bowl, which was filled up with water, -then mixed and strained. In addition to the kava, there were raw yams -served, and cooked food consisting of figs and fowls. The women had -their meal apart from the men. - -Meri repeated a short prayer before the meal, wishing them success in -their crops and in the battles in which they were often engaged. - -Edgar, having seen the kava prepared, did not relish tasting it, but at -a sign from Wal Jessop, he took the bowl and sipped a little. - -‘They would have been greatly offended had you refused it,’ Wal -explained. - -After the meal, which, with the exception of the kava, Edgar relished, -the men made speeches and danced, flourishing their clubs. It amused -Edgar to watch the children, of whom the men seemed very fond. The -copper-skinned little ones imitated their elders with precocious -dexterity. - -It was a curious sight to see these natives holding a marum under the -huge banyan tree, and as the shades of night quickly fell their figures -loomed in the light with a peculiarly weird effect as they danced and -chanted their monotonous song. - -Meri sat between Wal Jessop and Edgar, and as the dance proceeded, he -caught them one by each arm and nodded across the opening. Edgar and -Wal looked in the direction Meri indicated, and saw a strange figure -standing looking at the scene. - -Edgar sprang to his feet and shouted: - -‘The captain or his ghost!’ - -‘The very image of him,’ said Wal. - -The stranger had, however, noted their movements, and, suddenly -turning, darted back into the shadow of the trees. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVIII. A STRANGE STORY. - - -Wal Jessop hastily explained to Meri that it was their intention to -go in pursuit of the white man, and the chief said he would accompany -them. The meeting came to an end, the savages dispersing to their -various huts. - -Meri, beckoning to Wal and Edgar to follow him, led the way across the -marum into the forest beyond. They were soon in richly-wooded country, -and found progress difficult. Edgar constantly stumbled over some -tangled, twisted root that lay hidden in his path; thorns, growing on -some of the bushes, pricked him and tore his clothes, and Wal Jessop -was in no better plight. Meri, however, did not appear to mind the -thorns, but walked on at a rapid pace. - -They continued their tramp for some time, but saw nothing of the white -man who had so quickly and mysteriously disappeared. - -When they halted to rest Wal Jessop questioned Meri, and learned that -the white man had been on the island for some time. He came in a -trading vessel, and was left behind, either wilfully or through his -own desire. The natives regarded him with superstition, and thought -him scarcely human. Meri himself was evidently a believer in the white -man’s powers over the natives for good or evil. - -On resuming their search they came upon a pathway evidently cut in the -bush, and along this Meri led them. - -He halted at the entrance to a small clearing, and here they saw a -strange sight. - -Standing straight up from the ground were several large trunks of -trees, that had been hollowed out and rudely carved in the shape of -hideous heads at the top. They appeared to be idols, and Meri regarded -them with a look of awe. - -‘This is a Sing-Sing ground,’ said Wal; ‘I have heard of them before, -but never seen one. This is where their gods live, and it is regarded -as a sacred grove. If the white man is here it easily accounts for the -fear with which he is regarded. No native would remain here alone; in -fact, they dare not venture except upon special occasions. I’ll ask -Meri about it.’ - -Wal questioned the chief, who said he could enter the sacred grove as -chief of his tribe, and they walked into the clearing. Raising his club -Meri struck one of the hollow trunks a blow, and it echoed through the -forest with a sound like a drum. - -Edgar looked into the hollow of each tree, but saw nothing. Presently a -tall figure glided into the grove, and stood still regarding them. - -They were at once convinced it was the unfortunate captain of the -_Distant Shore_ standing before them, but he showed no sign that he -recognised them. - -He was strangely altered from the fine, stalwart seaman they had known -as Captain Manton of the _Distant Shore_. His figure was gaunt and -thin, and his arms and hands were mere skin and bone. His hair was -white, his beard of the same hue, and his eyes looked vacantly from -under his bushy eyebrows. He wore an old coat, which reached to his -knees, and his legs and feet were bare. As he advanced slowly towards -them Meri fell back, but Edgar and Wal stood their ground. - -‘Begone!’ said this ghost-like figure of Captain Manton. ‘This is -no place for you. Begone, and leave me in peace! I harm no one. I am -quite alone--alone in a world of my own, peopled with the ghosts of the -drowned!’ - -Edgar stepped forward, and, looking him straight in the eyes, said: - -‘Do you not know me, Captain Manton? I am Edgar Foster. I was saved -from the wreck with your daughter Eva.’ - -At the mention of Eva’s name a momentary light of intelligence came -into the man’s eyes, but it quickly died away, and left them dull and -vacant. - -‘Poor fellow!’ said Edgar sorrowfully; ‘his brain has given way under -the strain. He must have suffered severely.’ - -‘Do you think he is mad?’ asked Wal. - -‘Not a dangerous form of madness,’ replied Edgar; ‘but I have no doubt -he is not in his right mind. We must humour him, and question him. He -has a strange story to relate, if he can be persuaded to tell it, and -if he remembers all he has gone through.’ - -Edgar took the unfortunate man by the hand, and persuaded him to sit -down. - -Meri looked on, his curiosity evidently being excited. - -Edgar tried as gently and simply as possible to lead the wandering mind -of the captain back to the wreck of the _Distant Shore_, and found, to -his delight, that he succeeded in rousing his dormant memory. - -Captain Manton began to talk in a strange, monotonous way. He was -evidently recapitulating what had happened to him after the wreck of -the _Distant Shore_, and he seemed almost unconscious of anyone being -present. - -From time to time during the course of the strange tale he related -Edgar refreshed his weak memory. - -‘If we can lead him on to tell us everything,’ said Edgar, ‘he may -recognise us in the end.’ - -‘I hope so,’ said Wal; ‘it is terrible to see him like this, but it may -be caused through not having any white men to converse with.’ - -Captain Manton--for, indeed, it was that unfortunate seaman--commenced -by telling them, in a somewhat incoherent way, that he was on a big -ship when it went on to the rocks and crashed to pieces. - -‘It was the captain’s fault,’ he said; ‘he ought to have made for a -harbour; he is responsible for all our deaths.’ - -‘You were saved,’ said Edgar. ‘You are not dead, and you ought to be -thankful. It was not the captain’s fault, for he was a brave man, and -a good seaman. I knew him well, and he was incapable of a cowardly -action.’ - -‘I knew him once,’ said Captain Manton, ‘but it must have been a very -long time ago. He’s dead now, and you say I am alive. Strange how -little I remember of Manton, for I must have known him well.’ - -‘You did,’ said Edgar. ‘Have you forgotten? Can you not remember that -you are Captain Manton, and that I saved your daughter Eva?’ - -‘Eva,’ said Manton, with a deep sigh, ‘I know the name very well--Eva; -yes, I once knew little Eva.’ - -He spoke in such pathetic tones that both Edgar and Wal Jessop were -affected. - -Suddenly Manton began to talk rapidly. - -‘I remember now,’ he said; ‘the captain went down with the ship. I was -tossed about on the rocks--washed on and then off again. A huge wave -rolled me back into the sea, and I clutched a broken spar. The captain -clutched that spar, too, but I pushed him off--ah, ah! I pushed him -off because there was only room for one; but he came up again and sat -beside me, and I had not strength to push him off again. He did not try -to push me off. Out to sea we were taken, and then I recollect nothing -until I awoke on board a small craft, and the captain was not there. He -must have fallen off the spar, and been drowned. I was starved on the -boat, for they had very little to eat. When they landed on some island, -they went away and left me. The natives were kind to me and gave me -food. I have lived here many years. I do no one any harm, and I want -to stay here. You will not take me away?’ he said suddenly, turning to -Edgar and Wal, with an imploring look in his eyes. - -Edgar evaded the question, and said: - -‘I will tell you what happened on the night the _Distant Shore_ was -wrecked, and how Wal Jessop here saved me and your daughter Eva.’ - -‘My daughter Eva!’ said Manton, with a soft smile--‘my daughter Eva!’ - -He lingered fondly over the name, and Edgar said to Wal: - -‘I believe if I relate all that took place he will remember. His -sufferings have caused loss of memory, that is all.’ - -‘I hope so,’ said Wal; ‘it is pitiable to find him like this.’ - -Edgar then told him as briefly as possible all that took place at the -wreck of the _Distant Shore_. As he described how Wal Jessop found -himself and Eva on the rocks, and at great risk got them to the top -of the cliffs, Manton’s eyes brightened, and he listened with intense -interest. - -‘Eva is now a beautiful little girl,’ said Edgar, ‘and she has been -expecting to see you. We have always told her you would come back to -her, and I am sure you will do so. You remember me now, do you not?’ -said Edgar; ‘and also your good friend in Sydney, Wal Jessop?’ - -‘Ay, you’ll remember me, skipper,’ said Wal, in a hearty voice; ‘I’ve -towed you safely into port many a time. Come, give me a grip of your -hand, and say you know me.’ - -Manton looked, first at Edgar, and then at Wal Jessop. He was wrestling -with the memories of the past that had so long been absent from him. -Gradually they saw his memory was recovering its power. The mind was -only clouded, and brighter days would chase the gloom away. - -‘My God! can it be true?’ said Manton, as he gazed at them. ‘Am I -dreaming, or am I mad? Can this be Edgar Foster, and my old mate, Wal -Jessop? Where am I, and how did I come here?’ - -He was wrestling with his memory, and gradually drawing it back to -life. With the return of reason he failed to comprehend what had -happened to him, and why he was on this wild island in the New Hebrides. - -‘True, true, true!’ he murmured; ‘they are indeed my friends! - -He grasped their hands, and his frame shook with the intense emotion he -felt. He was in a very weak state, and the reaction was too much for -him. The change from darkness to light overpowered him, and he sank -back in a dead faint. - -Meri, when he saw Manton fall back, to all appearance dead, sprang -forward and brandished his club in a savage manner. He thought Edgar -and Wal must have practised some witchcraft upon this white man, who -had been so long amongst them. - -Wal Jessop, leaving Manton in Edgar’s care, explained, as well as he -could, what had happened. Meri looked displeased when Wal said they -would take Manton away with them, and said evil would fall upon their -tribe if they allowed him to go. - -It was some time before Manton recovered, and when he did so he was -too weak to walk. Wal Jessop persuaded Meri to return with him to the -village, and obtain help to carry Manton to the beach. - -Edgar remained with the captain, and did all in his power to cheer him. -He knew it would be some time before they returned, and Manton was not -in a fit state to be left alone. With the return of his memory he had -become nervous and excited. For the first time since that fatal night -when the _Distant Shore_ was wrecked, he began to remember clearly what -had taken place. - -Edgar saw what it was preyed upon his mind, and said: - -‘Everyone will be glad to hear you have been saved in such a strange -and marvellous way. You will be heartily welcomed in Sydney when we -return; and think of little Eva waiting and watching for you.’ - -‘The ship was lost,’ said Manton in a hollow voice, ‘and I am -responsible. Did all on board perish with the exception of three?’ - -‘Yes,’ said Edgar; ‘but you were not to blame. Everyone praised your -conduct, for I told them how you stood by your ship, and went down with -her. Nothing could have saved her. You did all that man could do.’ - -‘And my poor wife?’ he moaned. - -Edgar was silent. He knew words would avail nothing. - -‘How did you find me?’ asked Manton. - -Edgar related how his father received a letter, and his own -determination to set out in quest of him in order to ascertain the -truth. - -‘And you did this for my sake?’ said Manton. - -‘I must not take too much credit for that,’ said Edgar. ‘A love of -adventure prompted me, and, although I hardly credited your being -alive, yet I knew it was not impossible.’ - -‘And where am I, and how long have I been here?’ asked Manton -wonderingly. - -‘You are on the island of Tana, in the New Hebrides,’ said Edgar. ‘You -were no doubt picked up by a schooner on its way to the South Seas from -Sydney.’ - -‘It is all very strange,’ said Manton. ‘I must have been near to death -when I was rescued from the sea.’ - -‘Your sufferings were so great that your mind became deranged,’ said -Edgar. ‘With complete rest, and amongst your friends, you will speedily -recover.’ - -Manton shook his head despondingly. He was in a melancholy mood, and -his mind was not quite balanced. As Edgar looked at him his heart was -full of pity for him, and he fervently hoped it would not be many weeks -before Captain Manton was fully recovered both in mind and body. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIX. WARLIKE SPORTS. - - -When Meri and Wal Jessop reached the village the chief explained to -his followers how the white men had recognised their friend, and the -natives were excited at such an unlooked-for occurrence. A stretcher -was quickly made of long poles and matting, and, accompanied by four -stalwart natives, Wal Jessop and Meri returned to the Sing-Sing ground -where they had left Edgar and Captain Manton. They carefully carried -Manton to the village, and Wal Jessop went out to the schooner to -obtain drugs from the medicine chest. - -In the course of a few days Captain Manton was much better, and eager -to be gone from the island. The chief and the natives, however, -seemed loath to part with him, and Edgar thought there might be some -trouble in getting him away. To make matters easier they presented -Meri and most of the natives--men, women, and children--with gifts of -beads, cloth, and small ornaments. It amused them to watch the women -adorning their persons with bright red and yellow cloths, and they were -particularly delighted some with the strings of bright-coloured beads. - -Edgar noticed the natives, even when going to walk in the plantations, -were armed, and Meri said they were always at war with one or more of -the neighbouring tribes. Even the women and children were armed, and -it was surprising with what accuracy of aim the smallest lads could -shoot their arrows. These natives were all fond of sports, and spent -the greater part of their time practising with the various weapons they -used. - -Meri, at Edgar’s request, ordered some native sports to take place; -and the men, nothing loath, prepared for them in a very short time. -Wal Jessop promised the most successful should have prizes given them, -selected from the stock of trade goods on board the schooner. - -Spear-throwing was first undertaken, and the natives aimed with -wonderful skill, far better than the Enooma blacks. They hurled their -spears with terrific force, and often buried them six inches deep in -the trunk of a tree the wood of which was almost as hard as iron. -Smooth stones were piled up on the beach, and the natives, using -slings, whirled them out to sea for such a long distance that the -splash made when they fell could hardly be seen. Club-swinging they -were clever at, and an attack with clubs, warded off by wooden shields, -made Edgar fearful for the result, so furious and excited did the -combatants become. - -The boys and girls, all naked, ran races on the clear white sand, and -swam out to sea in the most daring manner. One lad, a son of the chief, -shot his arrow through Meri’s fingers as he spread the back of his hand -out wide against a tree. The girls were quite as active as the boys, -and ran as fast, and swam as well. These youngsters had very little -fear in them, and even a shark near the shore did not frighten them, -for the lads would swim out with spears in their hands and attack the -monsters. - -The canoe-races caused much excitement, and the chief, Meri, paddled -dexterously--in fact, he was superior to the others in most of the -sports. - -Edgar was much interested in watching the natives build a canoe. A -tree was felled, and the branches cut off. Then, for a common fishing -canoe, the log was hollowed out about fifteen feet long, and a rough -canoe was soon formed. The better-built canoes were made of separate -planks raised from the keel, and laid on in pieces from twenty-five to -fifty feet long. Gum of the bread-fruit tree was used instead of pitch, -and smeared over to make them water-tight. The inside and outside were -smoothed, and when finished the canoe looked a creditable craft. - -Although Edgar enjoyed the experiences he was going through at Tana, he -was anxious to get away now Captain Manton had been discovered; but the -chief always made some excuse for detaining them, and Wal Jessop said -it would be safer to obtain his permission to leave. Captain Manton was -also in a hurry to depart, and once more get to sea. Wal Jessop gave -Meri to understand that it was necessary for them to leave, and the -chief said he would consider the matter. - -A meeting was held under the banyan tree in the marum, and the three -friends looked on, much interested in the proceedings. - -Wal Jessop gathered that there was considerable opposition to Captain -Manton’s departure, and that the chief did not care to resist the will -of the natives. When the meeting was over, Meri said his people were -not willing that Captain Manton should go with Edgar and Wal. - -To this Wal Jessop made no reply, but after consulting Edgar and -Captain Manton, it was arranged they should make a bolt for it at -night, seize one of the canoes, and row back to the schooner. - -Wal Jessop went to the schooner to give instructions for all to be -ready for sailing immediately they were on board. - -Towards evening, when the natives were returning from the plantation, -there was a great row amongst them. They came forward shouting, -dancing, and gesticulating, and in their midst was a poor wretched -native, almost ready to drop with fright. Meri’s men had kidnapped this -man, who belonged to another tribe, and he knew, poor wretch! the fate -in store for him. - -‘What will they do with that poor beggar?’ said Edgar. - -‘Eat him probably,’ said Wal Jessop with a shudder. ‘The natives here -are cannibals.’ - -‘Horrible!’ said Edgar. ‘Can we do nothing to prevent it?’ - -‘I am afraid not,’ said Wal. ‘I will remonstrate with the chief, but it -will be all to no purpose. All we can do is to take advantage of their -absence when the poor wretch is killed, and make for the schooner.’ - -‘Speak to Meri,’ said Edgar. ‘We ought to stop it if we can.’ - -Wal Jessop went to the chief, who acknowledged it was the custom to -kill and eat prisoners of another tribe. Wal then tried to buy the -wretch off, but the chief was firm. He could not interfere with the -custom of the tribe. - -That night a large fire was lighted in the marum, and they could see -the flames flashing in the darkness. - -They shuddered as they thought of what was about to take place; but as -they were powerless to interfere they determined to steal away to the -schooner. - -Cautiously they went down to the beach and secured a canoe. Captain -Manton sat in the bow, where there was a seat for the chief, and Wal -and Edgar paddled. - -Before they were half-way to the schooner the natives saw them, and, -uttering loud cries, ran down to the beach. A large canoe was quickly -launched, Meri took his place in the bow, and the pursuit commenced. - -‘They will overhaul us before we reach the schooner,’ said Wal. ‘Our -only plan is to frighten them. We have our rifles. You must send a -bullet or two in their direction, Edgar. Do not harm anyone if you can -help it, but strike the canoe somewhere near the chief. It will give -him a shock, and may hinder the pursuit.’ - -The natives were fast nearing them, their canoe skimming along the -water with wonderful swiftness. Meri stood up in the bow, spear in -hand, and signalled them to stop. His dark figure was plainly seen in -the moonlight which covered the sea with a soft, silvery glow. - -Edgar put down his paddle and took up his rifle, which he levelled at -the chief. - -Meri saw him, but did not flinch. He turned to his men and urged them -on. - -Edgar took aim and fired at the bow of the canoe. It was a lucky shot, -for just as he fired the bow of the canoe rose slightly, and the bullet -splintered the wood under Meri’s feet. - -This caused the chief to spring backwards, and in so doing he stumbled -and fell into the water. The natives at once ceased rowing, and -assisted him to get into the canoe. - -Edgar, as soon as he had fired the shot, put down the rifle and grasped -the paddle. They gained on the canoe again, and reached the schooner -before the natives. Captain Manton was assisted into the schooner, and -Edgar and Wal quickly followed, taking good care to throw their rifles -to the men on deck. - -Everything was ready for sailing immediately, but before the schooner -could get under way the canoe, full of natives, was alongside. - -Meri was about to spring on the schooner when Edgar levelled his rifle -at him, and Wal Jessop shouted: - -‘Get back, or we shall fire. We want to leave peaceably. Go back to -your island. You have had many presents from us.’ - -The chief said they wanted their white man back, and meant to have him. - -‘Then you must look out for a row,’ said Wal. - -The schooner was now under sail, and although there was but little -breeze, she made headway. Seeing the schooner gliding away, the chief -gave some order to his men, who stood up and hurled their spears at -those on deck. - -‘Lie flat down,’ shouted Wal, who saw their intention; and they all -fell on the deck. The spears whistled harmlessly over them, one or two -striking the mast. - -‘Give me the gun; I’ll give them a dose of shot for that,’ said Edgar. - -Wal Jessop handed him a gun, and Edgar fired it at the canoe. The shot -told, and one or two of the natives were hit, but not severely. This -had the desired effect, and, seeing pursuit was both hopeless and -dangerous, the chief ordered them to paddle back to the island. - -The travellers were all glad to get safely away from Tana, and decided -to sail direct to Sydney, as there was an ample supply of food on -board. Captain Manton seemed to recover every day at sea, and both -Edgar and Wal Jessop did all in their power to cheer him and make him -forget what he had suffered. - -The voyage back to Sydney was uneventful, and the little schooner -entered the Heads sooner than was expected, and cast anchor in Watson’s -Bay. - -Captain Manton, as they neared the Heads, had looked long at the fatal -rocks where the _Distant Shore_ went to pieces, and the tears stood in -his eyes as he thought of that awful night. - -When they were in the smooth waters of the harbour, and snugly at -anchor in Watson’s Bay, his spirits revived at the prospect of meeting -his daughter again. - -He wondered if she would know him, for he was much altered, and she was -a little child when last he saw her on that fatal night. - -‘I am sure she will recognise you,’ said Edgar; ‘you look much more -like your old self now. When we found you at Tana you were a different -man.’ - -They landed at the jetty, and walked up to Wal Jessop’s cottage. - -‘We shall give them a surprise,’ said Edgar. - -‘A pleasant one,’ said Wal. - -Captain Manton’s heart beat fast as he walked up the familiar road, and -hastened to meet the daughter he had thought he would never see again. - -‘Perhaps it will be better for me to go on first,’ said Wal, ‘and -prepare her. The sudden joy may be too much for Eva.’ - -They agreed, and Wal walked on. He reached the cottage door, and -knocked. His wife opened it, and gave a cry of joy as she saw him. -After a hearty embrace, she said anxiously: - -‘Where is Edgar? Is he well?’ - -‘Never better,’ said Wal. ‘Where’s Eva?’ - -Eva heard them talking, and came running into the room. She rushed into -Wal’s outstretched arms, and he kissed her tenderly. - -‘Edgar has come back,’ said Wal, ‘and someone else--someone you love -best in all the world.’ - -‘Daddy?’ said Eva excitedly. - -‘Yes,’ said Wal, looking from her to his wife; ‘daddy has come back.’ - -He heard footsteps outside, and said: - -‘And here he is, with Edgar.’ - -Captain Manton came into the room. Eva looked at him for a few moments, -evidently in doubt. - -‘Eva, my child, my little one, don’t you know me? Come to my arms, my -pet; come to daddy again.’ - -‘It is my daddy!’ said Eva, with a joyful cry, as she flew to -him. ‘Eddy said he would come back. I shall never let him go away -again--never, never, never!’ - - - - -CHAPTER XXX. GOOD-BYE TO AUSTRALIA. - - -How Captain Manton came to Sydney, and how he received a welcome of -the heartiest description on all sides, is well known throughout the -colony. His marvellous escape and subsequent adventures, and the -strange discovery of him at Tana by Edgar Foster and Wal Jessop, have -been related over and over again. His examination by the Marine Board -was thoroughly satisfactory, and Captain Fife said no man could have -done more than Captain Manton to save his ship. - -The tall, commanding form of Captain Manton, and the pretty child -accompanying him wherever he went, soon became familiar figures in the -parks of Sydney. The big, stalwart seaman was wrapped up in his child, -and his intense love for her was shown in every word and action. - -They sat together for hours on the grassy slopes of the Botanical -Gardens overlooking the harbour, and watched the big steamers pass to -and fro, and the sailing vessels towed out from their snug berths to -face the perils of an ocean voyage to some far-distant land. Those were -halcyon days for little Eva Manton, and she often thought of them in -after years, when the business of life had commenced for her in real -earnest. - -Leaving Captain Manton to rejoice in his new-found happiness, Edgar -Foster took a trip out West to Yanda, in order to bid good-bye to his -friends before finally departing for England. - -They were all very pleased to see him at Yanda, and Ben Brody could -not refrain from relating wonderful and improbable yarns about his -experiences with Edgar in London. - -‘It’s grown into a mighty big place,’ said Ben. ‘You fellows have no -idea what London is like. Bless me if the people are not thicker on the -pavements than sheep in a catching pen!’ - -‘What’s the mutton like over there?’ asked Jim Lee solemnly. - -‘Nearly as juicy as it is here,’ said Ben, with a wink, and a smack of -the lips that betokened fond remembrances of sundry succulent London -chops. - -Yacka made quite a scene when he discovered that Edgar had returned. He -summoned all the blacks in the neighbourhood, and a great corroboree -took place in his honour. - -To Edgar’s inquiries Yacka said he had resolved never to return to -the country of the Enooma, or to the cave of the White Spirit, now no -longer there. - -Yacka was contented to live and die at Yanda, where Ben Brody and the -hands were kind to him, and where he could idle away most of his time, -and spend a savage life such as the blackfellow loves. - -‘Would you not like to become civilized,’ asked Edgar, ‘and cultivate -the ways of the white man?’ - -‘No,’ said Yacka; ‘to be civilized means rum and ruin. Yacka loves his -freedom, and wants no civilization.’ - -It was in vain Edgar endeavoured to induce Yacka to leave Yanda, and -go to Sydney with him. The black was firm in his resolve never to quit -Yanda again, and many years after Edgar learned that Yacka died at the -station, and was much regretted, not only by the blacks, but also by -the hands. - -Before Edgar left Sydney he was entertained by the cricketers of the -city at a banquet, and the speeches made on that memorable occasion -were treasured by him. They were not mere after-dinner displays, but -real, genuine words spoken from the heart, and Edgar accepted them as -such. - -Edgar made many attempts to induce Captain Manton to return to England -with him. - -The captain, however, was firm in his determination not to leave Sydney. - -‘I want to end my days here in peace,’ he said to Edgar; ‘I have only -Eva to live for, and I feel we shall be happy here with our good -friends the Jessops. You will tell your father how much I thank him for -all his kindness to me and mine.’ - -‘I am sorry you have decided to remain here,’ said Edgar; ‘we should -all be so pleased to welcome you home.’ - -‘I feel I must remain, my lad,’ said Captain Manton. ‘I want to be near -the place where I lost my wife and my ship, and all the poor souls who -went down with her. God knows I did my best to save them, but it was -not to be. I feel it to be my duty to stay here--a duty I owe to the -dead who lie buried fathoms deep off this spot. At Watson’s Bay I hope -to end my days, and I am thankful Eva has been restored to me to keep -me from being lonely in my declining years.’ - -Wal Jessop became more reconciled to parting with Edgar Foster when -he heard that Captain Manton had decided to remain and take a small -cottage at Watson’s Bay. - -‘I should have been lost without one of you,’ he said, ‘and I don’t -know what the wife would have done without Eva. She loves that bairn as -much as if she were her own.’ - -The day that Edgar sailed for home Captain Manton and Eva stood on -the cliffs at Watson’s Bay, and watched the great steamer pass slowly -through the Heads. They waved their handkerchiefs, and Captain Manton, -looking through his glasses, spied Edgar leaning over the rails of the -upper-deck also waving a farewell. - -As he saw those two figures on the cliffs, Edgar Foster felt a sadness -creep over him at the thought that he might never see them again. He -watched them as the steamer ploughed its way south, until they were -mere specks against the sky-line. - -As for Captain Manton and Eva, they stood there until the steamer had -disappeared, and only a faint line of smoke denoted where she had sunk -below the horizon. Then the captain took Eva by the hand, and led her -gently down the rough, steep, pathway to Wal Jessop’s cottage. He did -not feel lonely, for he had his child to comfort him, and he knew the -remainder of his life would be quiet, uneventful, and peaceful. He had -determined to devote his life to his child, and to try and teach her -how to be a brave, good woman. - -Mrs. Jessop had been a mother to Eva, and she felt it would be hard to -part with her. - -‘Try and persuade Captain Manton to stay with us,’ she said to Wal. ‘We -have room for him, and then I shall not lose Eva.’ - -Wal Jessop broached the subject to Captain Manton, who was easily -persuaded to fall in with Mrs. Jessop’s wishes. - -‘It will be better for Eva,’ he said, ‘for your wife has taken her -mother’s place. I shall not want much attention. We old sailors are -accustomed to looking after ourselves and taking things easily, eh, -Wal?’ - -‘I guess we are,’ replied Wal; ‘I’m right glad you have decided to stay -with us, skipper. I believe the wife would have broken her heart if you -had taken Eva away from her.’ - -So Captain Manton and Eva remained at Wal Jessop’s cottage, and a happy -united family they were. - -Leaving Captain Manton and the Jessops, we must now return to Edgar -Foster, who, after a safe passage home, was once more at his father’s -house at Elm Lodge. - -He related how Captain Manton was found, and excited interest by -displaying a number of curiosities he had secured in the South Seas. - -‘I wish Manton had come home with you,’ said his father; ‘I wanted to -see him again.’ - -‘After all, I think he decided rightly to remain in Sydney,’ said -Edgar. ‘Eva was much attached to Mrs. Jessop, and Wal will be a good -companion for the captain.’ - -Naturally, Edgar had not been home long before he paid a visit to the -Wyldes, and he found Muriel looking more charming than ever. After -several years of travel, Edgar felt it was high time he settled down -and devoted himself to business seriously. He knew his father was -moderately well off, but he was determined to get his own living, and -not rely upon him. He did not know that Mrs. Wylde was a wealthy woman, -or he would perhaps have felt some diffidence in proposing to Muriel. - -Will Brown and Doris Foster were married soon after Edgar’s return, and -resided in a comfortable house at Putney. - -When Edgar had been at home some time, the secretary of the M---- -Cricket Club died, and Robert Foster thought it would be a good place -for his son. The salary was excellent, and the work such as Edgar -liked, and knew a good deal about. - -At a meeting of the club Edgar’s name came up, and the committee -decided in his favour, at the same time suggesting that he should play -when required. This suited Edgar’s plans admirably, and it was somewhat -of a novelty to see the secretary of such a club taking a prominent -position in the cricket-field. - -Feeling his position secure, and having now an ample income for his -wants, Edgar asked Muriel Wylde to marry him at an early date, and she -consented. The wedding took place at Twickenham Church, and never had -the sun shone on a prettier bride, or a more manly-looking bridegroom. - -Prosperity dogged Edgar’s footsteps, for he invested a considerable sum -in mines in West Australia, and being well advised, his speculation -proved successful. As the years rolled on he became a devoted husband -and father, and he taught his sons to be honest and manly, and to earn -for themselves a good name as lads of mettle. - -In the cricket-field Edgar constantly distinguished himself, and many a -century was recorded to his credit. Through his management the club of -which he was secretary advanced by leaps and bounds, until financially -it stood far above the average run of clubs, and in the cricket-field -had twice held the honours at the close of the season. - -News from Sydney came frequently, and kept Edgar in touch with the -world over the water, for which he had a great affection. - - * * * * * - -Many years after Edgar Foster left Sydney for the last time an old -man and a lovely girl were sitting on the cliffs at Watson’s Bay. -Below them the vast expanse of sea lay calm and still. Hardly a ripple -stirred the placid surface of the water, as it gently lapped over the -smooth worn slabs of rock at the base of the cliffs. A faint breeze -fanned the faces of the old man and the beautiful girl, and waved his -white beard gently, and caressingly lingered amidst her silken hair. It -was easy to see they were father and daughter, for she resembled him -very much. - -They both looked out to sea, and watched the boats sailing slowly in -the calm water. Scores of yachts and small boats had ventured outside -the Heads on this calm day. - -It was Sunday, and there were many people from Sydney enjoying the cool -breeze on the cliffs. Several of them looked at the gray-bearded man -and his lovely daughter, and there was respect in their glances, for -they knew the history of this inseparable pair. - -Eva Manton had developed into a lovely girl. The promise of childhood -had been fulfilled in womanhood--for woman she was, although her father -always called her ‘my little girl.’ - -Captain Manton was ageing rapidly, but still looked to have many years -of life before him. With sturdy Wal Jessop and his wife he passed life -comfortably, and lived for his daughter, who amply repaid the affection -he bestowed upon her. - -Eva Manton had her admirers as other girls have, but she kept them at -arm’s length. She meant to be her father’s companion while he lived, -and thought it no sacrifice upon her part to remain with him. - -Now she could understand all about that terrible wreck, and how Wal -Jessop’s sturdy arms had rescued Edgar Foster and herself from the -rocks below where they stood. - -She often sat there looking down into the depths, and thought how Edgar -Foster had at the risk of his own life saved hers. Then she would think -of the peril her father had passed through, and of his wonderful rescue -and discovery on the island by Wal Jessop and Edgar. She felt it was -good to be alive after such trials and sufferings, and she was thankful -for her existence. - -‘A letter from Edgar,’ said Wal Jessop one morning as they all sat in -the cottage. - -This was an important event, and one always eagerly looked forward to. -Edgar’s letters gave them all pleasure, they were so bright and cheery, -and full of good news and good wishes. - -Wal Jessop read it, and, as usual, had to repeat the operation. - -‘That’s what I call a manly letter,’ said Captain Manton. - -‘He was always a straight goer,’ said Wal Jessop. ‘As a lad he was a -manly youngster.’ - -‘He was brave,’ said Eva, ‘and full of courage. He risked his life for -mine.’ - -‘And for that I am ever grateful,’ said her father. - -‘I wish him well,’ said Wal, ‘for he deserves to be happy. I always -thought him a lad of mettle.’ - - - -BILLING AND SONS, PRINTERS, GUILDFORD. - - - - - * * * * * - - - - -Transcriber’s note: - -This book was published in 1897. - -Some cricketers in the book have the same names as well-known -cricketers of the time period. - -The original hard copy version of this book has advertisements at -the end, some of which are now illegible due to wear, and these -advertisements are not included in this version. - -Punctuation has been made consistent. - -Variations in spelling and hyphenation were retained as they appear in -the original publication, except that obvious typographical errors have -been corrected. - -The following change was made: - -p. 187: MacDonald changed to MacDonnell (the MacDonnell Ranges) - - - -***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A LAD OF METTLE*** - - -******* This file should be named 66030-0.txt or 66030-0.zip ******* - - -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: -http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/6/6/0/3/66030 - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - |